Mitsubishi Electric FR-A5NR Specifications

TRANSISTORIZED INVERTER

FR-A

500

F

500

E

500

FR-A

500/

F

500/

E

500 series

INTRODUCTION

Along with strong wiring-saving needs on the market, there are increasing needs for remote operation and monitoring by linking a personal computer, PLCs and inverters.

We have been responding to market needs with the MELSECNET/MINI-S3-compatible option units which are the lowerlevel link of our PLCs.

However, various field networks (lower-level link) have been made open mainly in Europe and U.S.A., and recent trends toward open field networks are rapidly making a deep penetration in the Factory Automation field.

In response to such trends toward open field networks, inverters are also being made open in various ways in the corresponding areas. To meet such trends, options or special-purpose products developed for compatibility with the major networks in the world are available for our inverters.

This manual explains the settings, programming methods and other general information of these network-compatible inverters and options.

Item

Developed by

Released

User group

RS-485

EIA Standard

April, 1983

Network Comparison Table

CC-Link

Mitsubishi Electric

October, 1996

None

DeviceNet

TM

Allen Bradley

March, 1994

ODVA

(Open DeviceNet

Vendor Association)

Profibus DP

Siemens, etc.

1994

PNO

(Profibus Netzer

Organization)

Modbus Plus

Modicon

None

Number of partners

122 250 575

Main supporters

SMC, CKD, Idec Izumi,

Sunx, Rika Kogyo,

Yamatake-Honeywell,

Sumitomo Heavy

Industries,

M System Giken,

NEC, Yokogawa

Electric

Device bus

ABB, Omron, Hitachi,

AEG Modicon,

Cutler Hammer,

Square D,

SST, NAMCO

Device bus

Rockwell, ABB,

Omron, Fesco,

GE Fanuc,

Allen Bradley,

Fuji, AEG Modicon,

Klockner Mueller

Groupe Schneider

Position

Industry application

Major area

Communication speed

General

General

General

19.2Kbps maximum

General

Asia

156K to 10Mbps

Automobile

North America

125K to 500Kbps

Device bus

Automobile

Europe

9.6K to 12Mbps

Device bus

General

North America, Europe

38.4Kbps maximum

Overall distance

Communication system

Maximum message size

Connection cable

Max. number of nodes

Max. number of link points

Real scan time

Remarks

Applicable inverters

500m

1200m (156Kbps)

600m (625Kbps)

200m (2.5Mbps)

100m (10Mbps)

500m (125Kbps)

250m (250Kbps)

100m (500Kbps)

1200m (9.6Kbps)

200m (1.5Mbps)

100m (12Mbps)

450m (1Mbps)

450m extendible per installation of one repeater, max. 1800m

Master/slave Master/slave

Master/slave,

N: N

Master/slave Master/slave

14 bytes

M D: 150 bytes

D M: 34 bytes

8 bytes 32 bytes No limit

Twisted pair

32

Twisted pair

64

4-wire

(single pair

+ power pair)

64

(including master)

Twisted pair, fiber-optic

(option)

32

(126 using repeaters)

512 I/O

(I/O 256 each)

Twisted pair

61

Response time approximately 25ms

(9600bps)

Global communication standard widely used throughout the world.

The values given in the table are for inverters.

2048 I/O

512 words

4ms

(2048 I/O 10Mbps)

7ms (2048 I/O + 512 registers 10Mbps)

Setting of the standby master station enables data link to be continued if a fault occurs in the master station.

The temporary error disable station function allows the unit to be changed with the data retained online.

(PU connector used for compatibility)

FR-A500

FR-F500

FR-E500

(Plug-in option used for compatibility)

FR-A500 + FR-A5NR

FR-F500 + FR-A5NR


FR-A500 + FR-A5NC

FR-F500 + FR-A5NC

FR-E540 + FR-E5NC

(Dedicated inverter used for compatibility)

FR-E520KN

2048 I/O

7ms (63 devices)

2ms

(512 I/O 12Mbps)

Omron and Hitachi are actively publicizing in

Japan.

Unsuitable for communication of large volumes of transmission data because the data that may be transmitted in one package is a maximum 8 bytes.


FR-A500 + FR-A5ND

FR-F500 + FR-A5ND

As of April, 1997, about

80% of Profibus nodes shipped are DP.

The maximum communication speed of original 1.5Mbps

was increased to

12Mbps in 1995.

PNO has set up offices in 15 countries, and

Profibus International was established in

1995 to integrate global management.


FR-A500 + FR-A5NP

FR-F500 + FR-A5NP

No limit

(master memory range)

Modicon's private network


FR-A500 + FR-A5NM

FR-F500 + FR-A5NM

CONTENTS

1 COMPUTER LINK (RS-485) 1

1.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................................. 1

1.2 Specifications ........................................................................................................................................................... 2

1.3 Structure................................................................................................................................................................... 4

1.3.1 Connection with PU connector (FR-A500, F500) ............................................................................................... 4

1.3.2 Connection with PU connector (FR-E500).......................................................................................................... 5

1.3.3 Connection of FR-A5NR..................................................................................................................................... 6

1.4 Configuration and Wiring Method ............................................................................................................................. 7

1.4.1 Connection with PU connector ........................................................................................................................... 7

1.4.2 Connection of FR-A5NR..................................................................................................................................... 9

1.5 Inverter Setting ....................................................................................................................................................... 11

1.6 Operation Modes .................................................................................................................................................... 13

1.6.1 Connection with PU connector ......................................................................................................................... 13

1.6.2 Connection of FR-A5NR................................................................................................................................... 13

1.7 Operational Functions ............................................................................................................................................ 16

1.8 Computer Programming ......................................................................................................................................... 18

1.9 Troubleshooting...................................................................................................................................................... 22

1.10Setting Items and Set Data..................................................................................................................................... 23

1.11Error Code List ....................................................................................................................................................... 25

2 CC-Link 26

2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................ 26

2.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................................................... 28

2.3 Structure................................................................................................................................................................. 32

2.3.1 When FR-A5NC is connected .......................................................................................................................... 32

2.3.2 FR-E520KN ............................................................................................................................................. 34

2.3.3 When FR-E5NC is connected .......................................................................................................................... 35

2.3.4 Master and local modules................................................................................................................................. 37

2.4 Configuration and Wiring Method ........................................................................................................................... 39


2.6 Operation Modes .................................................................................................................................................... 42


2.6.2 FR-E520KN ............................................................................................................................................. 45




2.7.2 FR-E520KN ............................................................................................................................................. 51


2.8 PLC Programming .................................................................................................................................................. 55

2.9 How to Check for Error with the LED Lamps .......................................................................................................... 69

2.10Troubleshooting...................................................................................................................................................... 72

3 Device Net

TM

73

3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................ 73

3.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................................................................... 74

3.3 Structure................................................................................................................................................................. 75

3.4 Configuration and Wiring Procedure....................................................................................................................... 77


3.6 Operation Modes .................................................................................................................................................... 84


3.8 DeviceNet Programming ........................................................................................................................................ 89

3.9 Object Map ............................................................................................................................................................. 97

3.9.1 Class 0x01 Identity object................................................................................................................................. 97

3.9.2 Class 0x03 DeviceNet object............................................................................................................................ 98

3.9.3 Class 0x04 Assembly object............................................................................................................................. 98

3.9.4 Class 0x05 DeviceNet connection object ....................................................................................................... 100

3.9.5 Class 0x28 Motor data object ......................................................................................................................... 103

3.9.6 Class 0x29 Control management object......................................................................................................... 103

3.9.7 Class 0x2A AC drive object ............................................................................................................................ 104

3.9.8 Class 0x66 A500 expansion object I............................................................................................................... 106

3.9.9 Class 0x67 A500 expansion object II.............................................................................................................. 110

3.10EDS File ............................................................................................................................................................... 113

4 Profibus-DP 114

4.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................................. 114

4.2 Specifications ....................................................................................................................................................... 115

4.3 Structure............................................................................................................................................................... 116

4.4 Configuration and Wiring Procedure..................................................................................................................... 118

4.5 Inverter Setting ..................................................................................................................................................... 121

4.6 Operation Modes .................................................................................................................................................. 122

4.7 Operational Functions .......................................................................................................................................... 125

4.8 Profibus Programming.......................................................................................................................................... 127

4.9 Parameter Definitions ........................................................................................................................................... 136

4.9.1 IND=0000H Real-time monitor area ............................................................................................................... 136

4.9.2 IND=01PPH System environment variable area............................................................................................. 137

4.9.3 IND=0200H Standard parameter area............................................................................................................ 138

4.9.4 IND=0300H, Pr. 900 frequency calibration area ............................................................................................. 142

4.9.5 IND=0400H, Pr. 900 % calibration area ......................................................................................................... 143

4.9.6 IND=0800H Programmed operation time setting area.................................................................................... 143

4.9.7 IND=0700H Programmed operation rotation direction setting area ................................................................ 144

4.9.8 IND=0600H Programmed operation frequency setting area........................................................................... 145

4.10Profibus Device Data (GSD File) .......................................................................................................................... 146

5 APPENDICES 147

5.1 Data code List ...................................................................................................................................................... 147

5.1.1 FR-A500 series............................................................................................................................................... 147

5.1.2 FR-F500 series............................................................................................................................................... 153

5.1.3 FR-E500 series............................................................................................................................................... 157

1

COMPUTER LINK (RS-485)

1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................ 1

1.2 Specifications ......................................................................................................... 2

1.3 Structure................................................................................................................. 4

1.4 Configuration and Wiring Method ........................................................................... 7

1.5 Inverter Setting ....................................................................................................... 11

1.6 Operation Modes .................................................................................................... 13

1.7 Operational Functions ............................................................................................ 16

1.8 Computer Programming ......................................................................................... 18

1.9 Troubleshooting...................................................................................................... 22

1.10 Setting Items and Set Data................................................................................... 23

1.11 Error Code List ..................................................................................................... 25

1.1 Overview

COMPUTER LINK (RS-485)

Computer link allows inverters connected with a computer, such as a personal computer, by communication cables to be operated and monitored and their parameters to be changed, saved etc. by user programs.

(1) Features of computer link-compatible inverters

1) Communication function is standard.

You can remove the operation panel (or cover etc.) and use RS-485 to perform communication operation via the

PU connector.

Note: A commercially available converter is required when using a computer (personal computer) which only has

RS-232C communication.

2) Plug-in option is also available.

The computer link plug-in option available for the FR-A500 and FR-F500 series inverters and enables RS-485 communication operation to be performed with the Parameter unit (operation panel) connected.

3) Setup Software

The Setup Software which offers an easy-to-use inverter environment is available to support you from inverter startup to maintenance.

(2) Types of computer link-compatible inverters

Inverter Series

FR-A500

FR-F500

FR-E500

Method for Compatibility with Computer Link

PU connector Plug-in option

Connected to PU connector



Connect FR-A5NR plug-in option.

Connect FR-A5NR plug-in option.

Incompatible

1

1.2 Specifications


1.2 Specifications

(1) Power supply

(2) Conforming standard

(3) Transmission form

(4) Communication cable

(5) Transmission distance

(6) Number of inverters connected

(7) Applicable computer

! Control power: Supplied by the inverter

! Communication power: 5VDC, maximum 60mA

! [EIA Standard] Shared between RS-422 and RS-485

! Multidrop link system

! Twisted pair cable

! Maximum 500m overall

! Up to 10 inverters for RS-422 computer interface

! Up to 32 inverters for RS-485 computer interface

! Computer with RS-422 or RS-485 interface function

By using a converter, a computer with RS-232C interface function is also applicable.

(8) Communication specifications

Connection of FR-A5NR

Conforming standard

Number of inverters connected

Communication speed

Control procedure

Communication method

Station number setting

Character system

Stop bit length

Terminator

Check system

Parity check

Sum check

Connection with PU Connector

RS-485 Standard

1: N (maximum 32 inverters)

Selectable between 19200, 9600 and

4800bps

Asynchronous system

Half duplex system

0 to 31

ASCII (7 bits/8 bits) selectable

1 bit/2 bits selectable

CR/LF (yes/no selectable)

Yes (even/odd)/no selectable

Yes

Selectable between 19200, 9600, 4800,

2400, 1200, 600 and 300bps

Waiting time setting Yes/no selectable

(9) Response time

Data transmission time

(Refer to the following formula)

Inverter data processing time

= waiting time + data check time

(setting × 10ms) (12ms)

Computer

Inverter

Inverter

10ms or longer required

Computer


(Refer to the following formula)

[Data transmission time formula]

1

Communication speed

(Baudrate)

× Number of data characters

(Refer to inverter manual)

×

Communication specifications*

(Total number of bits)

= data transmission time (s)

*Communication specifications (Refer to the following table)

Name

Stop bit length

Data length

Number of Bits

1 bit

2 bits

7 bits

8 bits

Name

Parity check

Start bit

Note: 1 bit is always required for the start bit.

Minimum total number of bits: 9 bits, maximum total number of bits: 12 bits

Yes

No

Number of Bits

1 bit

0

1 bit

2


! Example: Response time when forward (reverse) rotation command is given by communication


20ms or more <Calculation example 1>

(Refer to the calculation

Inverter data processing time example 1 on the right) 1) Baudrate = 9600 baud, number of data

= waiting time + data check time

(setting × 10ms) + (12ms) characters = 12, stop bit length = 2 bits, data length = 8 bits, parity check = yes (presence),

Computer

Inverter

CR, LF instructions = yes (presence)

1

9600

× 12 × 12 = 0.015s(15.0ms)

Inverter 2) Same conditions as above with the exception of

10ms or longer required

Computer


(Refer to the calculation example 2 on the right) baudrate = 19200 baud

1

19200

× 12 × 12 = 0.0075s(7.5ms)

3) Same conditions as above with the exception of baudrate = 300 baud

0

<Example 1>

Format A'

ENQ

1

Inverter station number

2 3

Instruction code

4 5 6

<Example 2>

Format G

ACK

1


2 3

CR LF

4 5

Time

7

Data

8

Sum check CR LF

9 10 11 12

Number of characters


<Calculation example 2>

1) Baudrate = 9600 baud, number of data characters = 5, stop bit length = 2 bits, data length = 8 bits, parity check = yes (presence),

CR, LF instructions = yes (presence)

1

9600

× 5 × 12 = 0.00625s(6.25ms)


1

19200

× 5 × 12 = 0.003125s(3.125ms)


1

300

× 5 × 12 = 0.2s(200ms)

"At-A-Glance" Guide to Response Time

Number of

Data

Characters

5

5

10

10

12

12

14

14

Communication

Specifications

(Total number of bits)

10

12

10

12

10

12

10

12

300

166.7ms

200.0ms

333.3ms

400.0ms

400.0ms

480.0ms

466.7ms

560.0ms

600

83.3ms

100.0ms

166.7ms

200.0ms

200.0ms

240.0ms

233.3ms

280.0ms

Communication Speed (bps)

1200

41.7ms

50.0ms

83.3ms

100.0ms

100.0ms

120.0ms

116.7ms

140.0ms

2400

20.8ms

25.0ms

41.7ms

50.0ms

50.0ms

60.0ms

58.3ms

70.0ms

4800

10.4ms

12.5ms

20.8ms

25.0ms

25.0ms

30.0ms

29.2ms

35.0ms

9600

5.2ms

6.3ms

10.4ms

12.5ms

12.5ms

15.0ms

14.6ms

17.5ms

19200

2.6ms

3.1ms

5.2ms

6.3ms

6.3ms

7.5ms

7.3ms

8.8ms

3

1.3 Structure


1.3 Structure

1.3.1 Connection with PU connector (FR-A500, F500)

(1) Appearance

PU connector

(RS-485)

Modular jack type junction connector holder

(2) PU connector pin-outs

1) to

8)

1) SG

2) P5S

3) RDA

4) SDB

5) SDA

6) RDB

7) SG

8) P5S

Note 1. Do not make connection to the computer LAN board, FAX modem socket or telephone modular connector.

Doing so may damage the product due to differences in electrical specifications.

Note 2. Pins 2 and 8 (P5S) are power supplies for the operation panel or parameter unit. Do not use them when performing RS-485 communication.

Note 3. Use a commercially available RS-485/RS-232C converter when the personal computer's communication board has the RS-232C specifications.

(3) Mounting method

1) Hold down the top button of the operation panel and pull the operation panel toward you to remove.

·Removal

2) Unplug the modular jack type junction connector. (Place the removed modular jack type junction connector into the modular jack type junction connector holder.)

3) Securely plug one end of the connection cable into the PU connector of the inverter and the other end into the personal computer (or converter etc.).

4


1.3.2 Connection with PU connector (FR-E500)

(1) Appearance

PU connector

(RS-485)

(2) PU connector pin-outs

1) SG

2) P5S

3) RDA

4) SDB

5) SDA

6) RDB

7) SG

8) P5S

8) to 1)

Note 1. Do not make connection to the computer LAN board, FAX modem socket or telephone modular connector.

Doing so may damage the product due to differences in electrical specifications.

Note 2. Pins 2 and 8 (P5S) are power supplies for the operation panel or parameter unit. Do not use them when performing RS-485 communication.

Note 3. Use a commercially available RS-485/RS-232C converter when the personal computer's communication board has the RS-232C specifications.


1) Remove the operation panel. Hold down the portion indicated by arrow A in Fig. A and remove the operation panel as shown in Fig. B. (If you remove it in any other way, force applied to the internal connector may damage the product.)

A

Fig. A Fig. B Fig. C

2) Securely plug one end of the connection cable into the PU connector of the inverter and the other end into the personal computer (or converter etc.).

5


(1) Appearance

Front view

Mounting hole

Terminal block (screw size M3)

SDA SDB RDA RDB RDR SG A B C

Mounting holes

Rear view

Terminal symbol FR-A5NR

Option fixing holes Connector

Note: Never use the unused terminals as junction terminals since they are used in the option. Doing so may damage the option unit.

(2) Installation procedure

1) Securely insert the connector of the option unit far into the connector of the inverter. At this time, also fit the option fixing holes correctly. For the slot positions, refer to the figure below.

2) Securely fix the option unit to the inverter on both sides with the accessory mounting screws. If the screw holes do not match, the connector may not have been plugged correctly. Check for loose connection.

3) Route the cables so that they do not take up a large space in the control circuit terminal block wiring area of the option unit.

During wiring, do not leave wire off-cuts in the inverter. They can cause a fault, failure or malfunction.

Use the left-hand side space for routing the cables.

Inverter

(Without cover) Cable routing

Option unit

Accessory screw

(2 pcs.)

Option side connector

Slot 1

Slot 2

Inverter side connector

Slot 3

Note 1. Only one option of the same model may be used. When two or more options are mounted, priority is in order of slots 1, 2 and 3, and the options having lower priority are inoperative. (Only one communication option may be used.)

Note 2. When the inverter cannot recognize that the option is mounted, it displays "E.OPT".

Note 3. When one FR-A5NR is used with the other communication

Mounting

Position

Error Display

Slot 1 E.OP1

option than the FR-A5NR, no error is displayed and the relay output of the FR-A5NR and the communication

Slot 2 E.OP2

Slot 3 E.OP3

function of the other communication option are made valid.

Note 4. When installing the inverter front cover, the cables to the inverter's control circuit terminals and option terminals should be routed properly in the wiring space to prevent them from being caught between the inverter and its cover.

6

1.4 Configuration and Wiring Method


1.4 Configuration and Wiring Method

1.4.1 Connection with PU connector

(1) System configuration examples

1) Inverters used with a computer having RS-485 or RS-422 interface

Computer

Station 1 Station 2

Inverter

PU connector

(Note 1)

RS-485/RS-422 interface terminal

Inverter

PU connector

(Note 1)

Splitter (Note 3)

Station n

Inverter

PU connector

(Note 1)

Maximum number of inverters connected

RS-422: 10 inverters


Termination resistor

10BASE-T cable (Note 2)

Use the connectors and cables available on the market.

Note 1. Connector: RJ45 connector

Example: 5-554720-3, Japan AMP Co., Ltd.

Note 2. Cable: Cable conforming to EIA568 (e.g. 10BASE-T cable)

Example: SGLPEV 0.5mm × 4P, Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.

Note 3. Splitter

Example: BMJ-8 modular rosette, Hakko Electrical Mfg. Co., Ltd..........03-3806-9171

2) Inverters used with a computer having RS-232C interface

Computer

Station 1

RS-232C connector

RS-232C cable

RS-485 terminal

Maximum 15m

Converter

(Note 3)

Splitter (Note 4)

Inverter

PU connector

(Note 1)

Station 2

Inverter

PU connector

(Note 1)

Station n

Inverter

PU connector

(Note 1)


10BASE-T cable (Note 2)

Use the connectors and cables available on the market.

Note 1. Connector: RJ45 connector

Example: 5-554720-3, Japan AMP Co., Ltd.

Note 2. Cable: Cable conforming to EIA568 (e.g. 10BASE-T cable)

Example: SGLPEV 0.5mm × 4P, Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.

Note 3. Commercially available converter examples:

1) Model: FA-T-RS40

Converter

Nagoya Sales Office, Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd...........052-565-3435

2) Model: DAFXI-CABL series cable with built-in interface

+

DINV-485CAB connector conversion cable

Diatrend Co., Ltd ............06-6460-2100

Note 4. Splitter

Example: BMJ-8 modular rosette, Hakko Electrical Mfg. Co., Ltd. ........03-3806-9171

7


(2) Wiring method

1) Connection of one RS-485 computer and one inverter

Computer Terminals

Cable connection and signal direction

Signal Name

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

Description

Receive data

Receive data

Send data

Send data

Request to send

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

Request to send

Clear to send

Clear to send

Signal ground

Frame ground

10BASE-T cable

(Note 2)

0.3mm

2 or more

Inverter

PU connector

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

2) Connection of one RS-485 computer and n inverters (multiple inverters)

Computer

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

(Note2)

SG

Station 1

SG

Station 2


(Note 1)

SG

Station 3

Inverter Inverter Inverter

Note 1.

Depending on the transmission speed and/or transmission distance, the inverters may be affected by reflection. If so, provide a termination resistor. For connection using the PU connector, use a splitter because a termination connector cannot be fitted. The termination resistor should be connected to only the remotest inverter from the computer. (Termination resistor: 100 )

Note 2.

Connect in accordance with the manual of the computer used. Note that the computer terminal numbers depend on the model used.

8


(1) System configuration examples

1) Inverters used with a computer having RS-485 or RS-422 interface

Computer

RS-485/RS-422 interface terminal

Twisted pair cable

Station 1

Inverter

FR-A5NR

Station 2

Inverter

FR-A5NR

Station n

Inverter

FR-A5NR

Maximum number of inverters connected



Termination resistor jumper

2) Inverters used with a computer having RS-232C interface

Computer Station 1

Inverter

Station 2

Inverter

Station n

Inverter

RS-232C connector

RS-232C cable

Maximum 15m

FR-A5NR

Converter

(Note 1)

RS-422 terminal

RS-485 terminal

Note 1.

Commercially available converter examples:

1) Model: FA-T-RS40

FR-A5NR FR-A5NR


Converter

Nagoya Sales Office, Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd. ............ 052-565-3435

2) Model: DAFXI-CABL series cable with built-in interface

+

DINV-485CAB connector conversion cable

Diatrend Co., Ltd. .........06-6460-2100

9



1) Connection of one computer and one inverter

Cable connection and signal direction

Computer Terminals

Twisted pair cable (0.3mm

2 or more) Signal name

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

Description

Receive data

Receive data

Send data

Send data

Request to send

Request to send

Clear to send

Clear to send

(Note 2)

0.3mm

2 or more

SG

FG

Signal ground

Frame ground

FR-A5NR

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

RDR

SG

(Note 1)


2) Connection of one computer and n inverters (multiple inverters)

Computer

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

SG

FG

(Note 2)

SG

Station 1

SG

Station 2


(Note 1)

SG

Station 3

FR-A5NR FR-A5NR FR-A5NR

Note 1. The termination resistor jumper should be connected to only the remotest FR-A5NR from the computer. (Termination resistor: 100 )

Note 2. Connect in accordance with the manual of the computer used. Note that the computer terminal numbers depend on the model used.

10

1.5 Inverter Setting


1.5 Inverter Setting

(1) Parameters

<Connection with PU connector>

Parameter Number

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

Name Setting Range

Station number

Communication speed

Stop bit length/data length

0 to 31

48, 96, 192

0, 1 (data length 8)


0, 1, 2 Parity check presence/absence

Number of communication retries 0 to 10, 9999

Communication check time interval 0 to 999.8 sec., 9999

Waiting time setting 0 to 150ms, 9999

CR, LF presence/absence selection 0, 1, 2

Setting Increments Factory Setting

1

1

0

192

1

1

1

0.1

1ms

1

1

2

1

0 (Note)

9999

1

Note: The factory setting of Pr. 122 for the NA, EC and CH version inverters is "9999".

<Connection of FR-A5NR>

Parameter Number

331

332

333

334

335

336

337

338

339

340

341

342

Name


Speed command write

Link start mode selection

CR, LF presence/absence selection

E

2

ROM write yes/no

Setting Range

0 to 31

Communication speed


Parity check presence/absence

Number of communication retries

3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96,

192



0, 1, 2

0 to 10, 9999

Communication check time interval 0 to 999.8 sec., 9999

Waiting time setting 0 to 150ms, 9999

Operation command write 0, 1

0, 1

0, 1, 2

0, 1, 2

0, 1

Setting Increments Factory Setting

1 0

1 96

1

1

1

0.1

1ms

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

1

0

9999

0

0

0

1

0

(2) Station number setting (Pr. 117, Pr. 331 "inverter station number")

1) The station number may be set between 0 and 31.

When the RS-422 interface is used, the station number may be set between 0 and 31 but the number of inverters connected must be within 10.

2) Note that the same station number cannot be set for different inverters. (If such setting has been made, proper communication cannot be performed.)

3) Station numbers do not have to be sequential and may be skipped, e.g. as shown below:

Station 3 Station 0 Station 1 Station 21 Station 6

Computer

Station number setting example

(3) Communication specifications

Refer to the following table and set the parameters:

Parameter

Number

Description Data Setting

118, 332 Communication speed

3, 6, 12, 24, 48,

96, 192 (Note 1)

119, 333


0, 1, 10, 11

120, 334

124, 341


CR, LF instruction presence/absence

0, 1, 2

0, 1, 2

Data Definition

3: 300 baud. 6: 600 baud. 12: 1200 baud. 24: 2400 baud.

48: 4800 baud. 96: 9600 baud. 192: 19200 baud (Note 1)

0, 10: Stop bit length = 1 bit 1. 11: Stop bit length = 2 bits.

0, 1: Data length = 8 bits. 10, 11: Data length = 7 bits

0: No parity check

1: Odd parity

2: Even parity

0: Without CR and LF

1: With CR only

2: With CR and LF

Note 1. The setting range of Pr. 118 is 48, 96 and 192.

Note 2. The inverter will not be faulty if the Pr. 333 "stop bit length/data length" setting differs from the actual data value.

11


(4) Number of data communication error retries

Set the permissible number of retries at occurrence of data receive error. If the number of consecutive errors exceeds the permissible value, the inverter will come to an alarm stop.

Parameter

Number

Name Data Setting Data Definition

121, 335


0 to 10

9999

(65535) (Note 1)

Permissible number of retries at error occurrence

If the number of retries exceeds the preset value, the inverter will come to an alarm stop. (Factory-set to one)

If a communication error occurs, the inverter will not come to an alarm stop. At this time, the inverter can be coasted to a stop by MRS or

RESET input.

During an error, the minor fault signal (LF) is given to the open collector output. Allocate the used terminal with any of Pr. 190 to

Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection) for A500 series inverters.

Allocate the used terminal with any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 for E500 series inverters.

Note: The data to be entered from the parameter unit is 9999 and that from the computer is 65535 (FFFF

H

).

(5) Permissible communication time interval

Set the permissible communication time interval between the computer and inverter.

(If no-communication with the computer persists for more than the permissible time, the inverter will come to an alarm stop due to time-out error.)

Parameter

Number


122, 336

Communication check time interval

0

0.1 to 999.8

9999(65535)

(Note 1)

Computer link operation disallowed

Permissible communication time interval (0.1 second increments)

Communication check stop

Note 1. The data to be entered from the parameter unit is 9999 and that from the computer is 65535 (FFFF

H

).

Note 2. At power-on (or reset), communication time interval check begins when the first communication is started.

Note 3. If the parameter setting is changed, check begins when the change is made.

Note 4. If communication is broken due to signal cable breakage, computer fault etc., the inverter does not detect such a fault. This should be fully noted.

(6) E

2

ROM write yes/no (connection of FR-A5NR)

When the FR-A5NR is connected, choose whether the parameters will be written to E

2

ROM or not.

Parameter

Number


342

E

2

ROM write yes/no

0

1

Written to both E

2

ROM and RAM.

Written to RAM only.

12

1.6 Operation Modes


1.6 Operation Modes

1.6.1 Connection with PU connector

(1) Operation Modes

1) External operation ....................................... Controls the inverter by switching on/off external signals connected to the control circuit terminals of the inverter.

2) Communication operation (PU connector).... Controls the inverter in accordance with the computer program via the PU connector.

Since the PU connector is used for operation, the PU operation mode is the communication operation (PU connector) mode.

(2) Operation mode switching method

Change the operation mode as described below:

Switched by computer program

A

External operation

Communication operation

(PU connector)

B

Symbol

A

B

Switching Type

Communication operation (PU connector)

external operation

External operation communication operation

(PU connector)

Switching Method

By the user program of the computer (Note 1)

By the user program of the computer (Note 1)

Note 1.

Set "0" in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" to carry out the above switching.

When "1" is set in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection", the operation mode available is the communication operation (PU connector) only.

When "2" is set in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection", the operation mode available is the external operation only.

(1) Operation modes

1) PU operation ......................... Controls the inverter from the keyboard of the operation panel/parameter unit (FR-

DU04/FR-PU04) (referred to as the "PU") installed to the inverter.

2) External operation ................. Controls the inverter by switching on/off external signals connected to the control circuit terminals of the inverter. (The inverter is factory-set to this mode.)

3) Computer link operation ........ Controls the inverter in accordance with the computer program via the computer link unit (FR-A5NR).

By setting parameters Pr. 338 "operation command write" and Pr. 339

"speed command write" as appropriate, the operation signal and running frequency can be entered from the control circuit terminals.

(2) Operation mode switching

1) Operation mode switching conditions

Before switching the operation mode, check that:

! The inverter is at a stop.

! Both the forward and reverse rotation signals are off; and

! The Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" setting is correct.

(Use the operation panel/parameter unit (FR-DU04/FR-PU04) of the inverter for setting.)

5

6

7

8

Setting

0

1

2

3

4

Operation Mode Selection

PU or external operation

PU operation only

External operation only

External/PU combined operation

External/PU combined operation

Programmed operation

Switch-over

External operation (PU interlock signal)

PU or external (signal switching)

Switching to Computer Link Operation Mode

Disallowed when the PU mode is selected. Allowed when the external mode is selected.

Disallowed

Allowed

Disallowed

Disallowed

Disallowed (Parameter values write-enabled in the external operation mode may be changed)

Allowed

Allowed only in the external operation mode when the PU interlock signal

(X12) is on.

Allowed only in the external operation mode (X16 on).

13


2) Operation mode switching method


Switched by computer program

C

Switched by parameter unit

A

Computer link operation

External operation

PU operation

D B

E

F

(Switching disallowed)

Symbol

A

B

C

D

E

F

Switching Type

PU operation external operation

External operation PU operation

External operation computer link operation

Computer link operation external operation

PU operation computer link operation

Computer link operation PU operation


Operate the external operation key sheet on the PU.

Operate the PU operation key sheet on the PU.

By the user program of the computer.

By the user program of the computer.

Switching disallowed/allowed if external operation is selected in A and computer link operation is then selected in C. (Note 2)

Switching disallowed/allowed if external operation is selected in D and PU operation is then selected in B. (Note 2)

When "1 or 2" is set in Pr. 340 "link start mode selection", the operation mode is computer link operation at power on or inverter reset.

Note 1. When setting "1 or 2" in Pr. 340, the initial settings (station number setting, etc.) of the inverter must be made without fail.

Note 2. In the switch-over mode, switching in E and F is also allowed.

3) Operation mode display

The operation mode is displayed on the PU as indicated below:

! PU operation .................... PU

! External operation ............ EXT

! Computer link operation ... NET

4) Operation mode at power on and instantaneous power failure

By setting the Pr. 340 "link start mode selection" value as appropriate, the operation mode at power on and at restoration from instantaneous power failure can be selected.

Pr. 340

Setting Pr.79

Operation Mode Name Mode at Power On or at Restoration from Instantaneous Power Failure

0

5

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

8


PU operation only

External operation only

External/PU combined operation mode

Inverter goes into the external operation mode.

Inverter goes into the PU operation mode.


Running frequency is set in the PU operation mode and the start signal is set in the external operation mode.


Running frequency is set in the external operation mode and the start signal is set in the PU operation mode.

Programmed operation mode Inverter is operated by the program.

Switch-over mode Operation mode is switched while running.

External operation mode Shift to the PU operation mode is controlled by ON/OFF of the X12 signal.


Operation mode is switched by ON/OFF of the X16 signal.

1

2

Computer link operation

Computer link operation automatic restart after instantaneous power failure

Inverter goes into the computer link operation mode. (Program need not be used for switching)

When the computer link unit (FR-A5NR) is fitted and Pr. 57 setting is other than

9999 (setting of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure), automatic restart is made in the status prior to the occurrence of instantaneous power failure to continue computer link operation, if no communication signal is given from the computer. (Program need not be used for switching)

Note 1. If an instantaneous power failure occurs during computer link operation, the programming of the computer stops and remains stopped if power is restored.

If an instantaneous power failure occurs with "2" set in Pr. 340 "link start mode selection", the inverter continues operation in the status prior to the instantaneous power failure. (When Pr. 57 9999)

! The Pr. 340 value may be changed in any operation mode.

! To start computer link operation at power-on, set "1 or 2" in Pr. 340.

14


(3) Control location selection

In the computer link operation mode, operation can be performed by signals from external terminals in accordance with the settings of Pr. 338 "operation command write" and Pr. 339 "speed command write".

Control place

Operation command write (Pr. 338) 0: Computer selection

Speed command write (Pr. 339) 0: Computer

Fixed functions

(Functions equivalent to terminals)

Forward rotation command (STF)

Reverse rotation command (STR)

Start self-holding selection (STOP)

Output halt (MRS)

Reset (RES)

Computer link operation frequency

Computer

Computer

Both

Both

Computer

2

4

1 Compensation

0 Low-speed operation command (RL) Computer

1

Middle-speed operation command

(RM)

Computer

2

High-speed operation command

(RH)

Computer

3 Second function selection (RT)

4 Current input selection (AU)

Computer

5 Jog operation selection (JOG)

6

Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection (CS)

7 External thermal relay input (OH)

8 15-speed selection (REX)

9 Third function (X9)

10

FR-HC connection, inverter operation enable (X10)

11

FR-HC connection, instantaneous power failure detection (X11)

12 PU external interlock (X12)

13

External DC dynamic braking start

(X13)

14 PID control valid terminal (X14)

15

16

17

Brake opening completion signal

(BRI)

PU operation-external operation switching (X16)

Load pattern selectionforward/reverse rotation boost switching (X17)

18 Magnetic flux-V/F switching (X18)

19

Load torque high-speed frequency

(X19)

20

S-pattern acceleration/deceleration

C switch-over terminal

22 Orientation command

23 Pre-excitation

Remote setting (RH, RM, RH)

External

External

Computer

Computer

External

External

External

Computer

Computer

Computer

External

Computer

Computer

Computer

Computer

Computer

Computer

Computer

0: Computer

1: External

Computer

Computer

Both

Both

External

External

External

External

External

External

Computer

Both

External

External

External

Computer

External

External

External

Computer

External

Computer

External

Computer

Computer

Computer

Computer

Computer

Computer

External

1: External

0: Computer

External

External

External

External

Both

Computer

Compensation

Computer

Computer

Computer

External

External

External

External

Computer

External

External

External

External

External

Computer

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

Computer

1: External

1: External

External

External

External

External

Both

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

Both

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

Remarks

(Note 1)

Pr. 59 = 0

Pr. 59 = 0

Pr. 59 = 0

Pr. 59 = 0

(Note 2)

RH, RM, RL, RT selection functions

Programmed operation group selection (RH, RM, RL)

Pr. 59 = 1, 2

Pr. 79 = 5

Computer link operation disallowed

Stop-on-contact selection 0 (RL)

Stop-on-contact selection 1 (RT)

Computer

Computer

External

Computer

Computer

External

External

External

Pr. 270 = 1, 3

[Explanation of table]

External

Computer

Both

: Control by signal from external terminal only is valid.

: Control from sequence program only is valid.

: Control from both external terminal and computer is valid.

: Control from both external terminal and computer is invalid.

Compensation : Control by signal from external terminal is only valid if Pr. 28 (multi-speed input compensation) setting is 1.

Note 1. If the FR-HC is connected, inverter operation enable signal (X10) is not assigned when the FR-HC is used

(Pr. 30 = 2) or if the PU operation interlock signal (X12) is not assigned when the PU operation interlock function is set (Pr. 79 = 7). This function is also used by the MRS signal and therefore the MRS signal is only valid for the external terminals, independently of the Pr. 338 and Pr. 339 settings.

Note 2. The orientation command needs the FR-A5AP and FR-A5AX options.

15

1.7 Operational Functions


1.7 Operational Functions

(1) Operation mode-based functions

Operation Mode

Control location Item

PU operation External operation

Computer link operation

(when FR-A5NR is used)

Computer user program from PU connector

Computer user program from FR-A5NR

Control circuit terminal

Operation command

(start)

Running frequency setting

Monitoring

Parameter write

Parameter read

Inverter reset

Stop command (Note 3)

Operation command


Monitoring

Parameter write

Parameter read

Inverter reset


Inverter reset

Operation command

Frequency setting

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed (Note 4)

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Disallowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Disallowed (Note 4)

Allowed

Disallowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Disallowed

Disallowed

Disallowed

Allowed (combined mode)

Allowed

Allowed (Note 4)

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Disallowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Disallowed (Note 4)

Allowed

Disallowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Disallowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Allowed (Note 4)

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed (Note 1)

Allowed (Note 1)

Allowed

Disallowed (Note 4)

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed (Note 1)

Allowed (Note 1)

Note 1.

Depends on the Pr. 338 "operation command write" and Pr. 399 "speed command write" settings.

Note 2.

Cannot be reset from the computer when an RS-485 communication error occurs.

Note 3.

Depends on the Pr. 75 "reset selection" setting.

Note 4.

Depends on the Pr. 77 "parameter write inhibit selection" setting.

(2) Input from computer to inverter

1) Operation commands ...... The following command can be given:

<Connection via PU connector> <Connection via FR-A5NR>

Bit 0:

1: Forward rotation (STF)

Bit 0: Current input selection (AU)*

1: Forward rotation (STF)

2: Reverse rotation (STR)

3:

4:

5:

2: Reverse rotation (STR)

3: Low speed (RL)*

4: Middle speed (RM)*

5: High speed (RH)*

6:

7:

6: Second acceleration/deceleration (RT)*

7: Output halt (MRS)

The input signals marked * can be changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) for A500 and F500 series inverters.

2) Running frequency

The output frequency of the inverter can be set between 0 and 400Hz (16-bit binary in 0.01Hz increments)

3) Inverter reset

The inverter can be reset from the computer.

4) Parameter setting write

For the parameters indicated in Appendix "Data Code List", their settings can be written.

16


(3) Input from inverter to computer

1) Inverter status .......... The following operating status can be monitored.

Bit 0: Running (RUN)*

1: Forward running

2: Reverse running

3: Up to frequency (SU)*

4: Overload (OL)*

5: Instantaneous power failure (IPF)*

6: Frequency detection (FU)*

7: Alarm occurrence*

Note 1. For the FR-A500 and F500 series, the output signals marked * can be changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 195

(output terminal function selection).

Note 2. The E500 series uses Pr. 190 to Pr. 192. Also, for the FR-E500 series, bit 5: Instantaneous power failure

(IPF) is not available.

2) Inverter monitoring

! Output frequency ...... Binary in 0.01Hz increments

! Output current........... Binary in 0.01A increments

! Output voltage .......... Binary in 0.1V increments

! Alarm definition ........ Binary (up to eight alarms)

3) Parameter setting read

For the parameters indicated in Appendix "Data Code List", their settings can be read.

(4) Operation at alarm occurrence

Alarm Location

Inverter fault

Communication error

(communication from PU connector)

Communication error

(plug-in option)

Description

PU operation

Inverter operation

Data communication

PU connector Continued

FR-A5NR

Stop

Continued

Inverter operation

Stop/continued

(Note 1)

PU connector Stop Data communication

FR-A5NR Continued

Inverter operation

Data communication

PU connector Continued

FR-A5NR

Continued

Stop

Operation Mode

External operation



Stop

Continued

Stop

Continued

Continued

Continued

Stop

Continued

Continued

Continued

Stop

Note 1.

Can be selected by parameter setting (factory-set to continued).

Note 2.

Can be selected by parameter setting (factory-set to stop).

Continued

Continued

Stop

Continued

Stop/continued (Note 2)

Continued

Stop

(5) Communication error

Error Location

Communication error

(communication from PU connector)

Communication error (FR-A5NR)

Error Code

E.PUE

E.OP1 to E.OP3

(6) Inverter reset

Operation Mode

Resetting Method

Computer user program

Terminals RES-SD ON

Inverter power OFF

PU operation

Disallowed

Allowed

Allowed


Disallowed

Allowed

Allowed



Allowed (Note)

Allowed

Allowed

Note: When the inverter is reset in the computer link operation mode, it is put in the external operation mode.

Accordingly, to resume computer link operation, switch the operation mode to computer link operation again.

17

1.8 Computer Programming


1.8 Computer Programming

(1) Communication protocol

Data communication between the computer and inverter is performed using the following procedure:

Data read

Computer

(Data flow)

*2

Inverter 1) 4) 5)

Time

Inverter 2) 3)

*1

(Data flow)

Data write

Computer

*1. If a data error is detected and a retry must be made, execute retry operation with the user program. The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of consecutive retries exceeds the parameter setting.

*2. On receipt of a data error occurrence, the inverter returns retry data 3 to the computer again. The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of consecutive data errors reaches or exceeds the parameter setting.

(2) Communication operation presence/absence and data format types

Communication operation presence/absence and data format types are as follows:

No.

1)

Operation

Communication request is sent to the inverter in accordance with the user program.

Operation command

A’

Present

Running

Frequency

A

(A”)

(Note)

Present

Parameter

Write

A

(A”)

(Note)

Present 2) Inverter data processing time

3)

No error

Request

Reply data from the inverter accepted

(Data 1 is checked for error) With error

Request rejected

4) Computer processing delay time

No error

Answer from computer in

No processing

5) response to reply data 3

(Data 3 is checked for error)

With error

3 is output

C

D

Absent

Absent

Absent

C

D

Absent

Absent

Absent

C

D

Absent

Absent

Absent

Inverter

Reset

A

Absent

Absent

Absent

Absent

Absent

Absent

Monitoring

B

Present

E,E’

(E”) (Note)

F

Absent

G

H

Parameter

Read

B

Present

E

F

Absent

G

H

Note: For the FR-E500 series, the data format is A" or E" when you set any of "0.01 to 9998" in Pr. 37 "output frequency setting" and "1" in the data code "HFF".

(3) Data format

Hexadecimal data is used.

Data is automatically transferred in ASCII between the computer and inverter.

! Data format types

1) Communication request data from computer to inverter

[Data write]

Format A

*3

ENQ


Instruction code

Data

Sum check

*4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Number of characters

Format A'

*3

ENQ


2 3

Instruction code

4 5

Data

Sum check

*4

1 6 7 8 9 10 11 Number of characters

Format A"

*3

ENQ


Instruction code

Data

Sum check

*4

[Data read]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Number of characters

Format B

*3

ENQ


Instruction code

Sum check

*4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Number of characters

Note 1. The inverter station numbers may be set between H00 and H1F (stations 0 and 31) in hexadecimal.

Note 2. *3 indicates the control code.

Note 3. *4 indicates the CR or LF code.

When data is transmitted from the computer to the inverter, code CR (carriage return) or LF (line feed) is automatically set at the end of a data group on some computers. In this case, setting must also be made from the inverter according to the computer.

Also, the presence and absence of the CR and LF codes can be selected using Pr. 124 (Pr. 341).

Note 4. *5: When Pr. 123 (Pr. 337) "waiting time setting" 9999, create the communication request data with no

"waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)

18


2) Send data from computer to inverter during data write

[No data error detected] [Data error detected]

Format C

*3

ACK


*4 Format D

*3

NAK


1 2 3 4 Number of characters 1 2 3

3) Reply data from inverter to computer during data read

[No data error detected]

Format E

*3

STX

1


2 3 4

Read data

5 6 7

*3

ETX

8 9

Sum check

*4

10 11

Error code

4

*4

5 Number of characters

[Data error detected]

Format F

*3

NAK

1


2 3

Error code

*4

4 5

Format E'

*3

STX

1


2 3 4

Read data

5

*3

ETX

6 7

Sum check

8

*4


Format E"

*3

STX


2 3

Read data

*3

ETX

Sum check

*4

1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

4) Replay data from computer to inverter during data read

[No data error detected] [Data error detected]

Format G

*3

ACK


2 3

*4


Format H

*3

NAK

1


2 3 1

(4) Data definitions

1) Control codes


*4


Signal Name

STX

ETX

ENQ

ACK

LF

CR

NAK

ASCII Code

H02

H03

H05

H06

H0A

H0D

H15

Description

Start Of Text (Start of data)

End Of Text (End of data)

Enquiry (Communication request)

Acknowledge (No data error detected)

Line Feed

Carriage Return

Negative Acknowledge (Data error detected)

2) Inverter station number

Specify the station number of the inverter which communicates with the computer.

3) Instruction code

Specify the processing request (e.g. operation, monitoring) given by the computer to the inverter. Hence, the inverter can be run and monitored in various ways by specifying the instruction code as appropriate.

4) Data

Indicates the data such as frequency and parameters transferred to and from the inverter. The definitions and ranges of set data are determined in accordance with the instruction codes.

5) Waiting time

Specify the waiting time between the receipt of data at the inverter from the computer and the transmission of reply data. Set the waiting time in accordance with the response time of the computer between 0 and 150ms in

10ms increments (e.g. 1 = 10ms, 2 = 20ms).

Computer

Inverter

Inverter

Inverter data processing time

= waiting time date check time

+

(set value × 10ms) (12ms)

Computer

19


6) Sum check code

The sum check code is 2-digit ASCII (hexadecimal) representing the lower 1 byte (8 bits) of the result (sum) derived from the checked ASCII data.

(Example 1)

Computer inverter

E

N

Q

ASCII code 05

H

Station number

0 1

30

H

31

H

Instruction code

E 1

45

H

31

H

1

31

H

Data

Sum check code

0 7 A D F 4

30

H

37

H

41

H

44

H

46

H

34

H

Binary code

H H H H H H H H H

30+31+45+31+31+30+37+41+44

H

=1F4

Sum

*When Pr. 123 (Pr. 337) "waiting time setting" 9999, create the communication request data with no "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)

(Example 2)

Computer inverter

ASCII code

S

T

X

02

H

Station number

Read data E

T

X

Sum check code

0 1

30

H

31

H

1 7

31

H

37

H

7

37

H

0 3 0

30

H

03

H

33

H

30

H

Binary code

H H H H H H

30+31+31+37+37+30

H

=130

Sum

7) Error code

If any error is found in the data received by the inverter, its definition is sent back to the computer together with the NAK code.

Note 1.

When the data from the computer has an error, the inverter will not accept that data.

Note 2.

A request of any data communication, e.g. operation command, monitoring, is always given by the computer and the inverter will not return data to the computer. Hence, the program should be written to give a data read request as required from the computer at the time of monitoring, etc.

Note 3.

Data for link parameter expansion setting differs as indicated below between access to Pr. 0-Pr. 99 values and access to Pr. 100 and later:

Instruction

Code

Data

Link parameter expansion setting

Read

Write

7F

H

FF

H

00

H

: Pr. 0 to Pr. 99 values are accessible.

01

H

: Pr. 100 to Pr. 159, Pr. 200 to Pr. 231 and Pr. 900 to Pr. 905 values are accessible.

02

H

: Pr. 160 to Pr. 199 and Pr. 232 to Pr. 285 values are accessible.

03

H


09

H

: Pr. 990 value is accessible (and other 900 parameters).

(5) Programming instructions

1) The inverter does not accept data from the computer if it has an error. For this reason, a retry program for data error must be included in the user program.

2) A request of any data communication, e.g. operation command, monitoring, is always given by the computer and the inverter will not return data to the computer. Hence, the program should be written to give a data read request as required from the computer at the time of monitoring, etc.

20


(6) Program example (BASIC)

When the operation mode is switched to communication operation

10 OPEN “COM1:9600,E,8,2,HD” AS#1

20 COMST1,1,1:COMST1,2,1

30 ON COM(1)GOSUB*REC

40 COM(1)ON

Initial setting of I/O file

:Communication file opening

:Circuit control signal (RS, ER) ON/OFF setting

:Interrupt definition at data receive

:Interrupt enable

50 D$= “01FB10002” Transmission data setting

60 S=0

70 FOR I=1 TO LEN(D$)

80 A$=MID$(D$,I,1)

90 A=ASC(A$)

100 S=S+A

Sum code calculation

110 NEXT I

120 D$=CHR$(&H5)+D$+RIGHT$(HEX$(S),2) :Addition of control and sum codes

130 PRINT#1,D$

140 GOTO 50

Data transmission

1000 *REC

1010 IF LOC(1)=0 THEN RETURN

Interrupt data receive

:Interrupt occurrence at data receive

1020 PRINT “RECEIVE DATA”

1030 PRINT INPUT$(LOC(1),#1)

1040 RETURN

General flowchart

Line number

10

Input file to initial setting

40

50 to

Transmission data processing

·Data setting

·Sum code

calculation

·Data transmission

140

Interrupt

1000 to

1040

Receive data processing

·Data import

·Screen display

Note 1. When the inverter's communication check time interval is not set, interlocks are provided to disable operation to prevent hazards. Always set the communication check time interval before starting operation.

Note 2. Data communication is not started automatically but is made only once when the computer provides a communication request. If communication is disabled during operation due to signal cable breakage etc., the inverter cannot be stopped. When the communication check time interval has elapsed, the inverter will come to an alarm stop. The inverter can be coasted to a stop by switching on its RES signal or by switching power off.

Note 3. If communication is broken due to signal cable breakage, computer failure etc., the inverter does not detect such a fault. This should be fully noted.

21

1.9 Troubleshooting


1.9 Troubleshooting

(1) Data from computer unread by inverter

1) Computer conforming to RS-422 or RS-485 Standard?

2) Communication cables (and FR-A5NR) fitted properly? (Check for contact fault, open cable, wrong polarity, etc.)

3) Inverter initialization correct?

4) Station number setting (Pr. 117, Pr. 331) proper? (Check that setting and program matches and that the same station number is not used for different inverters.)

5) Communication check time interval (Pr. 112, Pr. 336) other than 0?

6) Proper communication request program executed in computer?

(2) Operation mode unswitched to computer link operation

1) When inverter is switched from external operation, are the signals to the external terminals STF or STR off?

2) Proper operation mode switching program executed?

(3) Inverter unstarted in computer link mode

1) Inverter starting program executed properly?

2) Control location select conditions set properly when FR-A5NR is connected?

3) Inverter output provided?

4) Permissible communication time interval set properly?

(4) Inverter brought to alarm stop during operation due to communication error

1) Communication cables (and FR-A5NR) fitted properly? (Check for contact fault, open cable, etc.)

2) Computer operating without fault?

3) Program written to give communication request from computer periodically?

4) Permissible communication time interval set properly?

5) Format of data transferred proper?

6) Termination resistor jumper connected?

22

1.10 Setting Items and Set Data


1.10 Setting Items and Set Data

After completion of parameter setting, set the instruction codes and data as indicated below and start communication from the computer to allow various types of operation control and monitoring.

No.

Item

Instruction

Code

Description

Number of Data

Digits

1 Operation mode

Read

Write

Output frequency

[speed]

Output current

Output voltage

Special monitor (Note 1)

Special monitor selection No.

(Note 1)

7B

H

FB

H

6F

H

70

H

71

H

72

H

Read 73

H

Write F3

H

0000

H

: Communication option operation (connection of FR-A5NR)

0001

H

: External operation

0002

H

: Communication operation (PU connector), PU operation

0000

H

: Communication option operation (connection of FR-A5NR)

0001

H

: External operation

0002

H

: Communication operation (PU connector)

0000

H

to FFFF

H

: Output frequency (hexadecimal) in 0.01Hz

increments

[Speed (hexadecimal) in 1r/min increments if Pr. 37 = 1 to 9998 or

Pr. 144 = 2 to 10, 102 to 110.]

0000

H

to FFFF

H

: Output current (hexadecimal) in 0.01A increments

0000

H

to FFFF

H

: Output voltage (hexadecimal) in 0.1V increments

0000

H

to FFFF

H

: Monitored data selected by instruction code F3

H

01

H

to 0E

H

: Monitor selection data

Data Description Increments Data

Output

01 H 0.01Hz

09 H frequency

02

H

Output current

03

H

05

H

Output voltage

Frequency setting

0.01A

0.1V

0.01Hz

0A

H

0B

H

0C

H

Description Increments

Regenerative

0.1% brake

Electronic overcurrent protection load

0.1% factor

Output current peak value

Converter output voltage peak value

0.01A

0.1V

06 H

Running speed

07

H

Motor torque

1r/min

0.1%

0D H Input power

0E

H

Output power

0.01kW

0.01kW

4 digits

4 digits

4 digits

4 digits

4 digits

2 digits

2

0000

H

to FFFF

H

: Two most recent alarm definitions

Alarm definition display example (instruction code 74

H

)

Read data: [Example] 30A0

H

(Previous alarm ........ THT) b15

(Most recent alarm ..... OPT) b8b7 b0

0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

Alarm definition 74

H

to 77

H

Previous alarm

(H30)

Most recent alarm

(HA0)

Alarm data

Data

Description

Data

Description

Data

Description

00

H

10

H

11

H

12

H

20

H

21

H

22

H

No alarm

OC1

OC2

OC3

OV1

OV2

OV3

60

H

70

H

80

H

(*)

81

H

(*)

90

H

A0

H

(*)

A1

H

(*)

OLT

BE

GF

LF

OHT

OPT

OP1

C0

H

(*)

C1

H

(*)

C2

H

(*)

D5

H

(*)

D6

H

(*)

D7

H

(*)

D8

H

(*)

CPU

CTE

P24

MB1

MB2

MB3

MB4

30

H

31

H

40

H

50

H

(*)

THT

THM

FIN

IPF

A2

H

(*)

A3

H

(*)

BO

H

B1

H

OP2

OP3

PE

PUE

D9

H

(*)

DA

H

(*)

DB

H

(*)

F6

H

(*)

MB5

MB6

MB7

E6

51

H

(*) UVT B2

H

RET F7

H

(*) E7

*Alarm data unavailable for FR-E500 series.

C0H(CPU) is output only when FR-A5NR is used.

3 Operation command FA

H

00

H

to FF

H

: Operation command

[Example 1] 02

H

... Forward rotation b7 b0

[Example 2] 00

H

... Stop 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

(For Example 1)

<Connection with PU connector> <Connection of FR-A5NR> b0: b0: Current input selection (AU)* b1: Forward rotation (STF) b2: Reverse rotation (STR) b3: b4: b5: b6: b1: Forward rotation (STF) b2: Reverse rotation (STR) b3: Low speed (RL)* b4: Middle speed (RM)* b5: High speed (RH)* b6: Second acceleration/deceleration (RT)* b7: b7: Output halt (MRS)

The input signals marked * can be changed using input terminal assignment functions.

Note 1.

Special monitoring is not available for the FR-E500 series.

4 digits

2 digits

23


No.

4

5

6

7

8

Running frequency write

E

2

PROM

User clear

Item

Inverter status monitor

Alarm definition batch clear

All parameter clear

Instruction

Code

7A

EE

F4

FC

FC

H

H

H

H

H

Description

00

H

to FF

H

: Inverter status monitor

[Example 1] 02

H

... Forward running

[Example 2] 80

H

... Stop due to

alarm occurrence b0: Inverter running (RUN)* b1: Forward running (STF) b7 b0

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

(For Example 1) b2: Reverse running (STR) b3: Up to frequency (SU)* b4: Overload (OL)* b5: Instantaneous power failure (IPF)* b6: Frequency detection (FU)* b7: Alarm occurrence*

* For the FR-A500 and F500 series, outputs change with the settings of Pr. 190 to Pr. 195.

Instantaneous power failure (IPF) is not available for the FR-

E500 series.

0000

H

to 9C40

H

: 0.01Hz increments (hexadecimal)

0 to 400.00Hz

To change the running frequency consecutively, write data to the inverter RAM. (Instruction code: ED

H

)

9696

H

: Batch-clears the alarm history.

All parameters return to the factory settings.

Any of four different clear operations is performed according to the data.

Data

Pr.

Communication Pr.

Calibration

Pr.

Other Pr.

EC

H

F3

H

FF

H

9696

H

9966

H

5A5A

H

•

55AA

H

•

When all parameter clear is executed with 9696

H

or 9966

H

, communication-related parameter settings also return to the factory settings. When resuming operation, therefore, make parameter setting again.

* 5A5A

H

and 55AA

H

are not available when the FR-A5NR is connected.

9669

H

User clear is made.

(Unavailable for FR-E500 series)

Communication

Pr.

Calibration

Pr.

Other Pr.

EC

H

F3

H

FF

H

Number of Data

Digits

2 digits

4 digits

4 digits

4 digits

4 digits

9 Inverter reset

10 Parameter write

11 Parameter read

12

13


Second parameter changing

(Instruction code FF

H

=1)

Read

Write

Read

Write

FD

H

80

H

to E3

H

9696

H

: Resets the inverter.

As the inverter is reset at start of communication by the computer, the inverter cannot send reply data back to the computer.

Refer to Appendices and write and/or read parameter values as required.

Note that some parameters may be inaccessible.

00

H

to 63

H

7F

FF

6C

EC

H

H

H

H

Parameter values of 00

H

to 6C

H

and 80

H

to EC

H

are changed.

00

H


01

H

: Pr. 100 to Pr. 159 , Pr. 200 to Pr. 231 and Pr. 900 to Pr. 905 values are accessible.

02

H

: Pr. 160 to Pr. 199 and Pr. 232 to Pr. 285 values are accessible.

03

H


09

H

: Pr. 992, Pr. 923, Pr. 990 and Pr. 991 values are accessible.

When setting the programmed operation (data codes 3D

H

to 5A

H

,

BD

H

to AD

H

) parameters (Unavailable for FR-E500 series)

00

H

: Running frequency

01

H

: Time

02

H

: Rotation direction

6 3

Time (Min.)

3 B

Min. (Sec.)

When setting the bias/gain (data codes 5E

H

to 6A

H

, DE

H

to ED

H

) parameters

00

H

: Offset/gain

01

H

: Analog

02

H

: Analog value of terminal

4 digits

4 digits

2 digits

2 digits

24

1.11 Error Code List


1.11 Error Code List

The corresponding error code in the following list is displayed if an error is detected in any communication request data from the computer:

Error

Code

Item Definition Inverter Operation

0

H

1

H

2

H

3

H

4

H

5

H

Computer NAK error

Parity error

Sum check error

Protocol error

Framing error

Overrun error

The number of errors consecutively detected in communication request data from the computer is greater than the permissible number of retries.

The parity check result does not match the specified parity.

Sum check code in the computer does not match that of the data received by the inverter.

Data received by the inverter is in wrong syntax, data receive is not completed within given time, or CR and LF are not as set in the parameter.

The stop bit length differs from initial setting.

New data has been sent by the computer before the inverter completes receiving the preceding data.

Brought to an alarm stop if error occurs continuously more than the permissible number of retries.

(E.PUE, E.OP1 to OP3)

6

H

7

H

Character error

The character received is invalid (other than 0 to 9, A to F, control code).

Does not accept receive data but is not brought to alarm stop.

8

H

9

H

A

H

B

H

C

H

Mode error

Instruction code error

Data range error

Parameter write was attempted in other than the computer link operation mode or during inverter operation.

The specified command does not exist.

Invalid data has been specified for parameter, running frequency write, etc.

Does not accept receive data but does not result in alarm.

D

H

E

H

F

H

25

2

CC-Link

2.1 Overview

.............................................................................................................. 26

2.2 Specifications

...................................................................................................... 28

2.3 Structure

............................................................................................................... 32


..................................................................... 39


.................................................................................................... 41

2.6 Operation Modes

................................................................................................ 42


........................................................................................ 48

2.8 PLC Programming

.............................................................................................. 55

2.9 How to Check for Error with the LED Lamps

.................................................. 69

2.10 Troubleshooting

................................................................................................ 72

26

2.1 Overview

CC-Link

"CC-Link" is the abbreviation of Control & Communication Link developed by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation as the nextgeneration Factory Automation field network.

A CC-Link system is designed to control from the PLC CPU the distributed I/O units, special function units (e.g. inverters) and other equipment connected by dedicated cables.

The CC-Link system has enabled wiring saving and fast data communication.

(1) Features of CC-Link-compatible inverters

1) High-speed communication

Cyclic transmission of not only bit data but also word data can be made to enable high-speed communication.

! Communication as fast as 10Mbps

! The broadcast polling system is used to ensure 3.9ms to 6.7ms high speeds even at the maximum link scan.

2) Variable communication speed/distance system

Selection of the appropriate speed and distance provides a wide range of applications such as a system demanding high speed and a system requiring a long distance.

3) Prevention of system fault (station separating function)

Due to the bus connection system, the communications of normal remote and local stations are not affected by the occurrence of a faulty remote or local station due to power off, etc.

Use of the removable terminal block allows the unit to be changed during data link.

4) Functionality for Factory Automation

Factory Automation can be easily applied to the inverters that share the link system as CC-Link remote device stations and are controlled and monitored by PLC user programs.

Various set values, such as motor speed and acceleration/deceleration time, can be changed and checked from the PLC.

(2) CC-Link stations

CC-Link consists of the following stations:

! Master station

! Local station

: Controls the whole CC-Link system.

: Loaded to the base unit and can communicate with the master and other local stations.

! Remote I/O station : Controlled by the master station in the CC-Link system.

Can transfer I/O signals from/to externally connected equipment.

! Remote device station

(CC-Link-compatible inverter)

: Controlled by the master station in the CC-Link system.

Can transfer externally connected equipment controlling I/O signals and digital-

! Intelligent device station analog conversion, temperature detection and other values.

: Controlled by the master station in the CC-Link system.

Can transfer I/O signals and numerical and character data.

26

CC-Link

(3) How the master and remote device stations communicate

In the CC-Link system, the inverter is a remote device station.

How the master and remote device stations communicate will be described below:

PLC CPU Master station

Remote device station

(CC-Link-compatible inverter)

3)

ON/OFF data

ON/OFF data storage area (for input)

1)

ON/OFF data

ON/OFF data storage area (for input)

4)

Numerical data

Numerical data storage area (for read)

2)

Numerical data

Numerical data storage area (for read)

5)

ON/OFF data

ON/OFF data storage area (for output)

7)

ON/OFF data

ON/OFF data storage area (for output)

6)

Numerical data

Numerical data storage area (for write)

8)

Numerical data

Numerical data storage area (for write)

1) The ON/OFF data of the remote device station (CC-Link-compatible inverter) is sent to the master station via the network and stored there.

2) The numerical data of the remote device station (CC-Link-compatible inverter) is sent to the master station via the network and stored there.

3) The PLC CPU reads the ON/OFF data stored in the master station.

4) The PLC CPU reads the numerical data stored in the master station.

5) The PLC CPU writes the ON/OFF data to the master station.

6) The PLC CPU writes the numerical data to the master station.

7) The ON/OFF data is sent from the master station to the remote device station (CC-Link-compatible inverter) via the network and stored there.

8) The numerical data is sent from the master station to the remote device station (CC-Link-compatible inverter) via the network and stored there.

The above sketch shows an image of general communication.

(4) Types of CC-Link-compatible inverters

Inverter Series

FR-A500

FR-F500

FR-E500

3-phase 200V class

3-phase 400V class

Single-phase 200V class

(FR-E520S-EC/CH)

Other than above

Method for Compatibility with CC-Link

Connect FR-A5NC plug-in option.

Connect FR-A5NC plug-in option.

Made compatible by FR-E520inverter.

Connect FR-E5NC plug-in option.

KN CC-Link-dedicated

Connect FR-E5NC plug-in option

Incompatible

27


CC-Link

2.2 Specifications

(1) Inverter side specifications

Item

Station type

Number of units connected

Terminal block

Specifications


42 inverters max. (1 station occupied by 1 inverter). May be used with other models.

Removable terminal block

(2) PLC side specifications

Item

Applicable CPU card

Communication speed

Communication system

Synchronization system

Transmission path form

Transmission format

Remote station number

Communication speed

Overall extension distance

Between master/local station and preceding/succeeding station

Between remote I/O station/remote device station and remote I/O station/remote device station

Error control system

Communication cable

Specifications

Q, QnA(H), QnAs(H), A1S, A1SH, AnUS(H), AnN, AnA, AnU(H)

10M/5M/2.5M/625K/156Kbps

Broadcast polling system

Frame synchronization system

Bus form (conforms to EIA RS-485)

Conforms to HDLC.

Stations 1 to 64

156Kbps 625Kbps 2.5Mbps

1200m 600m 200m 150m

5Mbps

110m 100m

10Mbps

80m

30cm or more

30cm or more

30cm or more

2m or more

60cm or more

30 to

59cm

CRC

Twisted pair cable (3-wire type)

For further details, refer to the "CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual".

1m or more

60 to

99cm

50m

30 to

59cm

(3) Twisted cable specifications

If the cables used are not the CC-Link-dedicated cables, we cannot guarantee the performance of the CC-Link system.

For the specifications and contact of the CC-Link-dedicated cables, refer to the CC-Link catalog L(NA)74108143.

28

CC-Link

(4) Data link processing time

1) Link scan time

The link scan time of CC-Link is found by the following expression:

<Link scan time (LS)>

LS= BT {29.4 + (NI × 4.8) + (NW × 9.6) + (N × 32.4) + (ni × 4.8) + (nw × 9.6)} + ST

+ { number of communication fault stations × 48 × BT × number of retries }

*

BT : Constant (transmission speed)

Transmission

Speed

BT

156kbps

51.2

625kbps

12.8

2.5Mbps

3.2

5Mbps

1.6

Master station

[µs]

10Mbps

0.8

NI : Last station number among a, b and c (including occupied stations but not including reserved stations)

NW : Last station number among b and c (including occupied stations but not including reserved stations)

Multiples of 8

Last Station

Number

NI, NW

1 to 8 9 to 16 17 to 24 25 to 32 33 to 40 41 to 48 49 to 56 57 to 64

8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64

N ni

: Number of connected stations (excluding reserved stations)

: a + b + c (excluding reserved stations) nw : b + c (excluding reserved stations)

ST : Constant (The largest value among 1) to 3). Note that 2) should be ignored when b = 0, and 3) ignored when c = 0.)

1) 800 + (a × 15)

2) 900 + (b × 50)

3) When c 26: 1200 + (c × 100)

When c • 26: 3700 + {(c - 26) × 25} a : Total number of occupied remote I/O stations b : Total number of occupied remote device stations (CC-Linkcompatible inverters) c : Total number of occupied intelligent device stations (including local stations)

* : Only when communication fault stations (including error invalid stations and temporary error invalid stations) exist

Example: Transmission speed of 2.5Mbps in the following system configuration example

Station 8* 1 Station 9* 3

Station 1* 1 Station 2* 1 Station 3* 1 Station 4* 2 Station 6* 2

Local station

Local station

Station 13* 1

Remote I/O station

Remote I/O station

Remote I/O station



Remote I/O station

*1: 1 station occupied *2: 2 stations occupied *3: 4 stations occupied

BT = 3.2

ST = 1700

NI = 13 16 1) 800 + (4 × 15) = 860

NW = 12 16 2) 900 + (4 × 50) = 1100

N = 8 3) 1200 + (5 × 100) = 1700

Ni = 13 a = 4 b = 4 c = 5

LS = 3.2 {29.4 + (16 × 4.8) + (16 × 9.6) + (8 × 32.4) + (13 × 4.8)

+ (9 × 9.6)} + 1700

= 3836.96 [µs]

= 3.84 [ms]

29

CC-Link

2) Transmission delay times

Transmission delay times (times until data is transmitted) are indicated below.

(a) Output signal (Master module to inverter)

<Expression>

SM + LS × 3 + inverter processing time [ms]

SM : Scan time of master station sequence program

LS : Link scan time (refer to Section 1))

Inverter processing time: 10 to 20ms

<Data flow>

TO TO

PLC CPU (SM)

Master station buffer memory

(Remote output RY)

Link scan (LS)

Inverter

RYn (output signal)

(b) Input signal (Inverter to master module)

<Expression>





<Data flow>

PLC CPU (SM)


(Remote input RX)

Link scan (LS)

Inverter

RXn (input signal)

FROM FROM

30

CC-Link

(c) Remote register (Master module to inverter)

<Expression>





<Data flow>

TO TO

PLC CPU (SM)


(Remote register RWw)

Link scan (LS)

Inverter

Remote register

(RWw)

(d) Remote register (Inverter to master module)

<Expression>





<Data flow>

PLC CPU (SM)


(Remote register RWR)

Link scan (LS)

Inverter

Remote register

(RW

R

)

31

FROM FROM

2.3 Structure

CC-Link

2.3 Structure

2.3.1 When FR-A5NC is connected

(1) Appearance

Mounting hole

Terminal block mounting/dismounting screw

Front view


Mounting holes

NC DB DG

DA SLD

(FG)

RUN

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

Transmission baudrate setting switch

FR-A5NC

STATION NO.

B.RATE

×10 × 1

Operating status indicator

LEDs

Station number setting switches

Option fixing holes

(2) Names and functions

Name Function

Rear view

Connector


Used to set the inverter station number between 1 and 64.

For details, refer to page 41.

× 10 × 1


Operating status indicator LEDs

Used to set the transmission speed.

Refer to page 41 for details.

RUN .......... Lit to indicate normal data communication with the master station.

L.RUN ....... Lit to indicate normal receipt of refresh data. Extinguished to indicate a break for a given period.

SD ............. Extinguished when send data is "0".

RD............. Lit on detection of receive data carrier

L.ERR........ Lit to indicate communication error of host station.

(3) Wiring of terminal block

Inverter

DATA PORT

Terminal block

Note: The mounting screws

do not come off.

32

CC-Link


1) Remove the front cover of the inverter and mount the option unit to slot 3.

2) Securely insert the connector of the option unit far into the connector of slot 3 in the inverter. At this time, also fit the option fixing hole snugly. For the position of slot 3, refer to the figure below.

3) Securely fix both sides of the option unit to the inverter with the accessory mounting screws. If the screw holes do not match, the connector may not have been plugged snugly. Check for loose plugging.

4) Remove the terminal block mounting/dismounting screws to dismount the terminal block.

5) Remove the DATA PORT from the inverter's front cover and reinstall the front cover. (To remove the DATA

PORT cover, push it from the back of the front cover.)

6) Reinstall the terminal block securely.

7) Route the cables so that they do not take up a large space in the control circuit terminal block wiring area of the option unit. Before wiring, mount the CC-Link unit (FR-A5NC) and fit the inverter front cover. During wiring, do not leave wire off-cuts in the inverter. They may cause a fault, failure or malfunction.

Inverter

(Without cover)

Slot 1

Inverter

(With cover)

Accessory screw

(2 pcs.) Slot 2

DATA PORT

Inverter side connector

Slot 3

CC-Link unit

(FR-A5NC)

Terminal block

Note: The mounting screws

do not come off.

Note 1.

Only one option of the same model may be used. When two or more options are mounted, priority is in order of slots 1, 2 and 3, and the options having lower priority are inoperative. (Only one

Note 2.

When the inverter cannot recognize that the option is mounted or when two or more communication option units are connected, E.OPT error is displayed.

Note 3.

communication option may be used.)

The errors shown change with the mounting slots 1, 2, 3.

If the inverter front cover is installed with the terminal block mounted, the front cover may not be installed securely.

Mounting

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Error Display

E.OP1

E.OP2

E.OP3

33

CC-Link

2.3.2 FR-E520KN

(1) Appearance

<Front view>

POWER lamp (yellow)

Accessory cover

ALARM lamp (red)


Rating plate

Front cover

Capacity plate

Wiring cover

<View without accessory cover and front cover>

POWER lamp

(yellow)


Control logic changing connector

PU connector (Note)

ALARM lamp (red)



Control circuit terminal block

CC-Link terminal block

Main circuit terminal block

Wiring cover

Note: Use the PU connector for the FR-PU04 (option) and RS-485 communication.


Name Function




× 10 × 1








L.ERR........ Lit to indicate communication error of host station. Flickers to indicate a change in setting of any switch or like while power is on.


The layout of the inverter's CC-Link communication signal terminals are as shown below.

Terminal screw size: M2.5

DA

DB

DG

SLD

SLD

FG


Use a twisted cable after stripping its sheath and twisting the wires. Stripping too much may cause a short with the adjacent wires. Stripping too little may cause the wires to come off.

6mm to 6.5mm

34

CC-Link

2.3.3 When FR-E5NC is connected

(1) Appearance

Mounting hole

Connector



Name


Mounting hole


B.RATE

X10 X1

FR-E5NC

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

NC DB DG

DA SLD FG



Terminal block screw size M3

Function




× 10 × 1








L.ERR........ Lit to indicate communication error of host station. Flickers to indicate a change in setting of any switch or like while power is on.


Terminal block

Note:The mounting screws

do not come off.

35

CC-Link


1) Remove the front cover and option wiring port cover.

2) Remove the sponge in the connector of the plug-in option , and match and insert the option unit's connector into the plug-in option connector of the inverter securely far enough.

3) Using the accessory mounting screws, fix the two portions at top and bottom of the option unit to the inverter. If the screw holes do not match, the connector may not have been plugged snugly. Check for loose plugging.

4) Reinstall the front cover to the inverter.

FR-E5NC loading status

Accessory screw

(2 pcs.)

Plug-in option connector Apply LED indicator seal.

Plug-in option mounting position

CC-Link unit

(FR-E5NC)

Terminal block

Note: The mounting

screws do not

come off.

Option wiring port cover

Note 1.

While the plug-in option is loaded, keep the option wiring port cover carefully.

Note 2.

When this option is loaded, the protective structure of the inverter is the open type (IP00).

Note 3.

If the inverter cannot recognize the loading of the option, it displays the E.OPT error.

36

CC-Link

2.3.4 Master and local modules

Five models of QJ61BT11, AJ61BT11, A1SJ61BT11, AJ61QBT11 and A1SJ61QBT11 are available as the master and local modules.

QJ61BT11

QJ61BT11

RUN

MST

SD

ERR.

L RUN

S MST

RD

L ERR.

STATION NO.

X10

X1

MODE

4

C

(FG)

NC

NC

DA

SLD

DB

SG

2

4

6

5

7

1

3

Master/Local Module Name

QJ61BT11

AJ61BT11

A1SJ61BT11

AJ61QBT11

A1SJ61QBT11

Applicable PLC Series

Q series

A series

AnS series

QnA series

Q2AS series

1)

2)

AJ61BT11

E

R

R

O

R

RUN

ERR.

MST

S MST

LOCAL

CPU R/W

SW

M/S

PRM

TIME

LINE

L RUN

L ERR.

A

J61BT11

156K

625K

2.5M

5M

10M

TEST

S0

S1

S2

SD

RD

B

R

A

T

E

T

E

S

T

1)

2)

4)

3),4)

6)

STATION NO.

X10

X1

MODE

0:ONLINE(A.R.)

2:OFFLINE

0

1

2

3

4

B RATE

156K

625K

2.5M

5M

10M

OFF

M/L

|

|

CLEAR

1

|

|

ISFM

ON

S MST

|

|

HOLD

4

|

|

SFM

ON

5

6

7

8

SW

1

2

3

4

2)

3)

4)

5)

A1SJ61BT11

B RATE

0 156K

1 625K

2 2.5M

3

4

5M

10M

NC

DA

NC

DB

NC

DG

NC

SLD

NC

A

1SJ61BT11

RUN

ERR.

MST

S MST

LOCAL

CPU R/W

L RUN

L ERR.

SW

M/S

PRM

TIME

LINE

SD

RD

STATION NO.

MODE

X

10

E

R

R

O

R

X

1

SW OFF ON

3

4

1

2

M/L

|

S.M

|

|

CLR

|

HLD

5

6

7

1

|

|

8 ISM

4

|

|

SFM

2

4

6

8

1

3

5

7

9

(FG) 10

1)

3)

5)

6)

NC

DA

NC

DB

NC

DG

SLD

NC

NC

(FG)

6

8

2

4

10

5

7

1

3

9

6) Number

1)

Name

LED indicators

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)


Mode setting switch

Transmission speed setting switch

Condition setting switches

Terminal block

37

AJ61QBT11

E

R

R

O

R

RUN

ERR.

MST

S MST

LOCAL

CPU R/W

SW

M/S

PRM

TIME

LINE

L RUN

L ERR.

A

J61QBT11

156K

625K

2.5M

5M

10M

TEST

S0

S1

S2

SD

RD

B

T

E

S

T

R

A

T

E

STATION NO.

X10

X1

MODE

0:ONLINE(A.R.)

2:OFFLINE

0

1

2

3

4

B RATE

156K

625K

2.5M

5M

10M

OFF

M/L

|

|

CLEAR

1

|

|

|

ON

S MST

|

|

HOLD

4

|

|

|

ON

SW

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

NC

DA

NC

DB

NC

DG

SLD

NC

NC

(FG)

6

8

2

4

10

5

7

1

3

9

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

2)

4)

A1SJ61QBT11

A

1SJ61QBT11

RUN

ERR.

MST

S MST

LOCAL

CPU R/W

L RUN

L ERR.

SW

M/S

PRM

TIME

LINE

SD

RD

E

R

R

O

R

STATION NO.

MODE

X

10

X

1

SWOFF ON

1 M/L S.M

4

5

2

3

6

7

8

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

CLR

1

HLD

4

|

|

|

B RATE

0

1

156K

625K

2 2.5M

3

4

5M

10M

NC

DA

NC

DB

NC

DG

NC

SLD

NC

2

4

6

8

1

3

5

7

9

(FG) 10

A1SJ61QBT11

6)

1)

3)

5)

CC-Link

Number

1)

Name

LED indicators

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)


Mode setting switch

Transmission speed setting switch

Condition setting switches

Terminal block

38

2.4 Configuration and Wiring Method


(1) System configuration example

Power supply module CPU module CC-Link module

A1S62PN A2SHCPU A1SJ61BT11

CC-Link

CC-Link master station manuals

AJ61BT11/A1SJ61BT11 CC-Link System

Master/Local Module User's Manual

(Details) ... SH-3603

AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 CC-Link

System Master/Local Module User's

Manual (Details) ... SH-3604

GPP

CC-Link-compatible inverters


CC-Link-dedicated cable


1) PLC side

Load the "QJ61BT11", "AJ61BT11", "A1SJ61BT11", "AJ61QBT11" or "A1SJ61QBT11" CC-Link system master/local module on the main or extension base unit of the PLC CPU used as the master station.

2) Inverter side

Install the CC-Link-compatible inverters. Load the optional CC-Link unit if required.

3) Connect the PLC CC-Link module master station and CC-Link-compatible inverters with the CC-Link-dedicated cables.

4) When the CPU has automatic refresh function (example: QnA series CPU)

Through communication with the corresponding devices using sequence ladders, data is automatically transferred to the refresh buffer of the master station at the execution of the END instruction to perform communication with the remote devices (CC-Link-compatible inverters).

5) When the CPU does not have automatic refresh function (example: AnA series CPU)

Data is transferred to the refresh buffer of the master station directly by sequence ladders to perform communication with the remote devices (CC-Link-compatible inverters).

39

CC-Link


1) Connection of one inverter

PLC CC-Link master module Inverter

Power supply

R

S

T

U

V

W

Motor

DA

DB

DG

SLD

CC-Link terminal block

DA

DB

DG

SLD

FG

Note: During wiring, take care to prevent wire off-cuts from entering the inverter. They can cause a fault, failure or malfunction.

2) Connection of multiple inverters

Termination resistor*

Master module

DA

DB

DG

SLD

FG

Shielded twisted cable

Inverter CC-Link terminal block

DA

DB

DG

SLD

FG

Shielded twisted cable

Inverter CC-Link terminal block

DA

DB

DG

Termination resistor*

Shielded twisted cable SLD

FG

*Use the termination resistors supplied for the PLC.

<Max. number of inverters connected to one master station>

42 units (when only inverters are connected)

When there are other modules, the number of stations occupied changes with the module and therefore the following conditions must be satisfied:

{(1×a)+(2×b)+(3×c)+(4×d)}

≤

64 a: Number of units occupying 1 station c: Number of units occupying 3 stations b: Number of units occupying 2 stations d: Number of units occupying 4 stations

{(16×A)+(54×B)+(88×C)}

≤

2304

A: Number of remote I/O stations

≤

64

B: Number of remote device stations

≤

42

C: Number of local stations

≤

26

40


CC-Link


(1) Inverter station number setting

Set the station numbers of the inverters before powering on the inverters and do not change the settings while power is on. Set the station numbers noting the following:

1) Station numbers may be set between 1 and 64.

Fully note that if you change any station number during operation, data communication cannot be made with the new station number.

2) Setting method

! Place the arrows ( ) of the corresponding switches to the positions of the station number you want to set.

Example

! For station 1: Set ( ) of

× 10 to "0" and ( ) of × 1 to "1".


+10 +1

! For station 26: Set ( ) of

× 10 to "2" and ( ) of × 1 to "6".

! Set the station numbers sequentially in order of connection.

(Station numbers may be specified independently of the connection sequence.)

! Note that the same station number cannot be used more than once.

(Doing so disables proper communications.)

! Securely set the station number switch in the numeral position.

Setting it between numerals disables proper data communications.

Correct example

Incorrect example

3) Connection example

CC-Link master module

Remote I/O station

(1 station occupied)

Station 00 Station 01

Inverter 1

(CC-Link unit)


Inverter 2

(CC-Link unit)


Inverter 3

(CC-Link unit)


Station 02 Station 03 Station 04

Number of units connected is 4.

Note: One inverter occupies one station. (One remote device station)

(2) Setting of transmission baudrate setting switch

Set the transmission speed.

(For details, refer to the CC-Link master module manual.)

Setting Switch Transmission Speed

2

3

0

1

156kbps

625kbps

2.5Mbps

5Mbps

4 10Mbps

Positions 5 and later are not used.

(If the switch is set to any of these positions, the L.ERR LED is lit to indicate a communication error.)

41


CC-Link

2.6 Operation Modes



1) PU operation : Controls the inverter from the keyboard of the operation panel (FR-DU04) or parameter unit

(FR-PU04) installed to the inverter.

2) External operation: Controls the inverter by switching on/off external signals connected to the control circuit terminals of the inverter.

3) PLC link operation: Controls the inverter in accordance with the PLC program via the CC-Link unit (FR-A5NC).




! The inverter is at a stop;


! The Pr. 79 "operation mode" setting is correct.

(Use the parameter unit of the inverter for setting.)

Pr. 79 Setting Operation Mode Selection

0

1

2

3,4

5

6

7

8


PU operation mode

External operation mode



Switch-over

External operation (PU operation interlock)


Switching to CC-Link Operation Mode


Disallowed

Allowed

Disallowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Allowed only in the external operation mode when the PU interlock signal (X12) is on.



Switched by PLC program

C

CC-Link

D

External operation

Switched from PU

A

B

PU operation

E

F (Switching disallowed)

Symbol

A

B

C

D

Switching Type



External operation CC-Link operation

CC-Link operation external operation


Operate the external operation key on the PU.

Operate the PU operation key on the PU.

By the user program of the PLC.


E

F

PU operation CC-Link operation

CC-Link operation PU operation

Switching disallowed. Allowed if external operation is selected in A and

CC-Link operation is then selected in C. (Note 2)

Switching disallowed. Allowed if external operation is selected in D and

PU operation is then selected in B. (Note 2)

When "1 or 2" is set in Pr. 340 "link start mode selection", the operation mode is CC-Link operation at power on or inverter reset.

Note 1.

When setting "1 or 2" in Pr. 340, the initial settings (station number setting, etc.) of the inverter must be made without fail.

Note 2.

In the switch-over mode (Pr. 79 = 6), switching in E and F is also allowed.

42

CC-Link

3) Link start mode

By setting the Pr. 340 value as appropriate, the operation mode at power on and at restoration from instantaneous power failure can be selected.

Pr. 340 Setting

Pr.79

Operation Mode

Mode at Power On or at Restoration from Instantaneous

Power Failure

0

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7


PU operation

External operation









Programmed operation mode Inverter is operated by the program.

Switch-over mode Operation mode is switched while running.

Shift to the PU operation mode is controlled by ON/OFF of the

X12 signal.

8



1

2

CC-Link operation

CC-Link operation

Inverter goes into the CC-Link operation mode. (Program need not be used for switching)

Inverter goes into the CC-Link operation mode. (Program need not be used for switching)

For computer link operation.


! When Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" = "0, 2 or 6", "1 and 2" in Pr. 340 are made valid.

! When starting CC-Link operation at power-on, set "1 or 2" in Pr. 340.

43

CC-Link

(3) Control place selection

In the CC-Link operation mode, commands from the external terminals and sequence program are as listed below:

Control place selection

Fixed functions


6

7

8

9

10

2

3

0

1

4

5

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

22

23


External

External

External

PLC

Both


External : Control by signal from external terminal is only valid.

PLC

Both

: Control from sequence program is only valid.

: Control from both external terminal and PLC is valid.

: Control from both external terminal and PLC is invalid.

Compensation : Control by signal from external terminal is only valid if Pr. 28 "multi-speed input compensation" setting is "1".

Note 1.

If the FR-HC connection, inverter operation enable signal (X10) is not assigned when the FR-HC is used

(Pr. 30 = 2) or if the PU operation interlock signal (X12) is not assigned when the PU operation interlock function is set (Pr. 79 = 7), this function is also used by the MRS signal and therefore the MRS signal is only valid for the external terminals, independently of the Pr. 338 and 339 settings.

Note 2.

The orientation command needs the FR-A5AP and FR-A5AX options.

44

CC-Link

2.6.2 FR-E520KN


1) PU operation : Controls the inverter from the keyboard of the operation panel or parameter unit (FR-PU04) installed to the inverter.

2) CC-Link operation : Controls the inverter in accordance with the PLC program by CC-Link.

(2) Operation mode switching method


Switched from PU

A

CC-Link operation

B

PU operation

Symbol

A

B

Switching Type




Can be switched from parameter unit (Note 1)

Can be switched from parameter unit (Note 1)

Note 1.

Set "0" in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" to carry out the above switching.

When "1" is set in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection", the operation mode available is the PU operation only.

When "2" is set in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection", the operation mode available is the CC-Link operation only.

You cannot change the operation mode with the user program from the PLC.


In the CC-Link operation mode, operation can be performed with the signals from the external terminals.

Operation Mode

Fixed functions

(Functions equivalent to terminals)

0

1

2

3

8

18

6

7

Reset (RES)

CC-Link Operation Mode

CC-Link operation frequency

Low-speed operation command (RL)

Middle-speed operation command (RM)

High-speed operation command (RH)

Second function selection (RT)

Output halt terminal (MRS)

External thermal relay input (OH)

15-speed selection (REX)

Magnetic flux-V/F switching (X18)

Both

PLC

Both

Both

Both

Both

Both

External

Both

Both

Remarks



PLC

Both

: Control from sequence program is only valid.

: Control from both external terminal and PLC is valid.

45

CC-Link



1) PU operation : Controls the inverter from the keyboard of the operation panel or parameter unit (FR-PU04) installed to the inverter.

2) External operation : Controls the inverter by switching on/off external signals connected to the control circuit terminals of the inverter.

3) CC-Link operation : Controls the inverter in accordance with the PLC program via the CC-Link unit (FR-E5NC).







(Use the operation panel of the inverter or the optional parameter unit for setting.)

Pr. 79 Setting

0

1

2

3, 4

6

7

8

Operation Mode Selection Switching to CC-Link Operation Mode


PU operation mode



Disallowed

Allowed

External/PU combined operation mode Disallowed

Switch-over Allowed


Allowed only in the external operation mode when the output halt signal (MRS) is on.

PU or external (signal switching) Allowed only in the external operation mode (X16 on).


Switched by sequence program

C

CC-Link

External operation

D

Switched from PU

A

B

PU operation

E


Symbol

A

B

C

D

E

F

Switching Type



External operation CC-Link operation

CC-Link operation external operation









CC-Link operation is then selected in C. (Note 2)

Switching disallowed. Allowed if external operation is selected in D and PU operation is then selected in B. (Note 2)

When "1 or 2" is set in Pr. 340 "link start mode selection", the operation mode is CC-Link operation at power on or inverter reset.

Note 1.


Note 2.

In the switch-over mode (Pr. 79 = 6), switching in E and F is also allowed.

46

CC-Link

(3) Link start mode

You can choose the operation mode at power-on or at power restoration after instantaneous power failure.

Set "1" in Pr. 340 value to choose the CC-Link operation mode.

After a link start, the program can be used to write parameters.

Note: Pr. 79 "operation mode" changes in function according to the inverter. For details, refer to the inverter instruction manual.

Pr. 340 Setting

Pr.79

Operation Mode

Mode at Power On or at Restoration from Instantaneous Power

Failure

0

(Factory setting)

1

0

1

2

3

4

6

7

8


PU operation

External operation



Switch-over mode



CC-Link operation






Operation mode is switched while running.

MRS signal ON .........Can be shifted to the PU operation mode.

(Output stop during external operation)

MRS signal OFF........Cannot be shifted to the PU operation mode.

X16 signal ON...........Shifted to the external operation mode.

X16 signal OFF .........Shifted to the PU operation mode.

Inverter goes into the CC-Link operation mode.

(Program need not be used for switching)

! The Pr. 340 value may be changed from the PU in any operation mode.

! When Pr. 79 "operation mode selection" = "0, 2 or 6", "1" in Pr. 340 is made valid.

! When starting CC-Link operation at power-on, set "1" in Pr. 340.


In the CC-Link operation mode, commands from the external terminals and sequence program are as listed below.

(Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection) change in functions according to the inverter. For details, refer to the inverter instruction manual.)


Fixed functions


0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

16

18


Pr. 338 "operation command right"

Pr. 339 "speed command right"

Forward rotation command

(STF)

Reverse rotation command

(STR)

Reset (RES)

CC-Link operation frequency

2

4




Second function selection

(RT)

Current input selection (AU)

Start self-holding selection

(STOP)

Output halt terminal (MRS)

External thermal relay input

(OH)



Magnetic flux-V/F switching

(X18)

Remote setting

(RH, RM, RH)

0: PLC

0: PLC

PLC

PLC

Both

PLC

PLC

PLC

PLC

PLC

Both

External

PLC

External

PLC

PLC

0: PLC

1: External

PLC

PLC

Both

External

External

External

External

External

PLC

Both

Both

External

External

External

PLC

External

1: External 1: External

0: PLC

External

External

Both

PLC

PLC

PLC

PLC

External

External

External

External

PLC

External

External

PLC

1: External

External

External

Both

External

External

External Pr. 59 = 0

External Pr. 59 = 0

External Pr. 59 = 0

External

Both

External

External (Note)

External

External Pr. 59 = 0

External

External

Remarks

External Pr. 59 = 1, 2



PLC : Control from sequence program is only valid.

Both : Control from both external terminal and PLC is valid.

: Control from both external terminal and PLC is invalid.

Note: When "7" (PU operation interlock function) is set in Pr. 79 "operation mode selection", this function is also used by the MRS signal and therefore the MRS signal is only valid for the external terminals, independently of the Pr. 338 and 339 settings.

47


CC-Link




Control Location

User program


Item

Operation command


Monitoring

Parameter write

Parameter read

Inverter reset

Error reset at inverter alarm

(RY1A)


Inverter reset terminal

Operation command

Frequency setting

PU operation

Disallowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Disallowed (Note 3)

Allowed

Disallowed

Allowed (Note 1)

Disallowed

Allowed

Disallowed

Disallowed

Operation Mode


Disallowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Disallowed (Note 3)

Allowed

Disallowed

Allowed (Note 1)

Disallowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

CC-Link operation

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed (Note 3)

Allowed

Allowed (Note 1)

Allowed (Note 1)

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed (Note 4)

Allowed (Note 4)

Note 1.

At occurrence of a communication error, the inverter cannot be reset from the PLC.

Note 2.

As set in Pr. 75.

Note 3.

As set in Pr. 77.

Values can be written to Pr. 4 to 6, 22, 24 to 27, 52 to 56, 232 to 239 and 271 to 274 during operation.

Note 4.

As set in Pr. 338 and Pr. 339.

Note 5.

The inverter goes into the external operation mode if it is reset from the PLC in the CC-Link operation mode.

Note 6.

In the programmed operation mode, parameters write-enabled in the external operation mode are writeenabled in CC-Link.

(2) Monitoring

The following items can be monitored by the PLC:

1) Output frequency......... Binary in 0.01Hz increments

2) Output current ............. Binary in 0.01A increments

3) Output voltage............. Binary in 0.1V increments

4) Alarm definition

5) Special monitoring....... Monitored data selected by instruction code HF3

6) Inverter status

! Forward running

! Reverse running

! Running (RUN)*

! Up to frequency (SU)*

! Overload (OL)*

! Instantaneous power failure (IPF)*

! Frequency detection (FU)*

! Alarm*

The output signals marked * can be changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection).

Note: Items 1) to 4) are read from the buffer memory by setting the corresponding code numbers when needed.

Item 6) can be read from the buffer memory any time.

48

CC-Link

(3) Operation commands

Any of the following commands can be output from the PLC to the inverter as an operation command any time:

! Forward rotation (STF)

! Reverse rotation (STR)

! Low speed (RL)*

! Middle speed (RM)*

! High speed (RH)*

! Second acceleration/deceleration (RT)*

! Inverter output halt (MRS)

! AU terminal*

! JOG terminal*

! CS terminal*

The input signals marked *1 can be changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection).

(4) Running frequency

The running frequency is written from the PLC to the inverter when it is changed ........ Binary in 0.01Hz increments

The running frequency may be written to either E

2

PROM or RAM.

When changing the frequency continuously, always write the data to the inverter RAM.

(5) Parameter write

Functions can be written from the PLC. Note that write during inverter operation will result in a write mode error.

(6) Parameter read

Functions can be read to the PLC.

49

CC-Link

(7) Operation at alarm occurrence

Alarm Location Description

Inverter alarm

Communication alarm (FR-A5NC)

Inverter operation

Data communication

FR-A5NC

Inverter operation

Data communication

FR-A5NC

PU operation

Stop

(Inverter trip)

Continued

Continued

Stop

Operation Mode


Stop

(Inverter trip)

Continued

Continued

Stop


Stop

(Inverter trip)

Continued

Stop

(Inverter trip)

Stop

1) Inverter side alarm

Refer to the inverter manual and remove the cause of the alarm.

2) Communication alarm

Check the LED states of the FR-A5NC and remove the cause.

Check the CC-Link master station.

3) Communication error in CC-Link operation

When a communication error occurs, the error message "E.OP3" appears.

4) Inverter reset


PU operation

Operation Mode

External operation CC-Link operation

PLC program

Inverter reset (Note 1)

(Instruction code)

Error reset at inverter fault

(RY1A) (Note 2)

Connect terminals RES-SD

Switch off inverter power

Disallowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Note 1.

The inverter may be reset any time.

Note 2.

The inverter may be reset only when its protective function is activated.

Note 3.

Reset cannot be made from the PLC when a communication error has occurred.

Note 4.

The inverter is set to the external operation mode if it has been reset in the CC-Link operation mode.

To resume the CC-Link operation, therefore, the inverter must be switched to the CC-Link operation again. (Switching is not needed when "1" or "2" is set in Pr. 340 "link start mode selection".)

50

CC-Link

2.7.2 FR-E520KN


The following table lists the functions that may be performed from the PLC by the CC-Link system:

Control Location Item

User program

Operation command


Monitoring

Parameter write

Parameter read

Inverter reset

Error reset at inverter alarm (RY1A)


Control circuit terminal Inverter reset terminal

PU operation

Operation Mode


Disallowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Disallowed (Note 3)

Allowed

Disallowed

Allowed (Note 1)

Disallowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed (Note 3)

Allowed

Allowed (Note 1)

Allowed (Note 1)

Allowed

Allowed

Note 1. At occurrence of a communication error, the inverter cannot be reset from the PLC.

Note 2. As set in Pr. 75.

Note 3. As set in Pr. 77.

Values can be written to Pr. 4 to 6, 22, 24 to 27, 52, 72 and 232 to 239 during operation.

(2) Monitoring


1) Output frequency ........... Binary in 0.01Hz increments

2) Output current ............... Binary in 0.01A increments

3) Output voltage ............... Binary in 0.1V increments

4) Alarm definition

5) Special monitoring ......... Monitored data selected by instruction code HF3

6) Inverter status

! Forward running

! Reverse running

! Running (RUN)*

! Up to frequency (SU)

! Overload (OL)


! Alarm*

The output signals marked * can be changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output terminal (remote input) function selection).





! Forward rotation (STF)


! Low speed (RL)*

! Middle speed (RM)*

! High speed (RH)*


The input signals marked *1 can be changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection). Note that some signals do not accept the command from the PLC according to the setting.

51

CC-Link


The running frequency is written from the PLC to the inverter when it is changed ..... Binary in 0.01Hz increments


2

PROM or RAM.







Alarm Location

Inverter alarm

Communication alarm

(CC-Link)

Description

Inverter operation

Data communication

CC-Link

Inverter operation

Data communication

CC-Link

PU operation

Operation Mode


Stop

(Inverter trip)

Stop

(Inverter trip)

Continued

Continued

Stop

Continued

Stop

(Inverter trip)

Stop




Check the LED states of CC-Link operation and remove the cause.



When a communication error occurs, the error message "E.OPT" appears.

4) Inverter reset


PU operation

Operation Mode


PLC program




(Instruction code)


(RY1A) (Note 2)

Disallowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Note 1.


Note 2.


Note 3.


Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

52

CC-Link


(1) Operation mode-based functions

The following table lists the functions that may be performed from the PLC by the CC-Link system:

Control Location

User program


Item

Operation command


Monitoring

Parameter write

Parameter read

Inverter reset

Error reset at inverter alarm

(RY1A)


Inverter reset terminal

Operation command

Frequency setting

PU operation

Disallowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Disallowed (Note 3)

Allowed

Disallowed

Allowed (Note 1)

Disallowed

Allowed

Disallowed

Disallowed

Operation Mode


Disallowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Disallowed (Note 3)

Allowed

Disallowed

Allowed (Note 1)

Disallowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed


Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed (Note 3)

Allowed

Allowed (Note 1)

Allowed (Note 1)

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed (Note 4)

Allowed (Note 4)

Note 1.

At occurrence of a communication error, the inverter cannot be reset from the PLC.

Note 2.

As set in Pr. 75.

Note 3.

As set in Pr. 77.

Values can be written to Pr. 4 to 6, 22, 24 to 27, 52, 72 and 232 to 239 during operation.

Note 4.


Note 5.

The inverter goes into the external operation mode if it is reset from the PLC in the CC-Link operation mode.

The inverter goes into the CC-Link operation mode when "1" is set in Pr. 340.

(2) Monitoring functions


1) Output frequency ........... Binary in 0.01Hz increments

2) Output current ............... Binary in 0.01A increments

3) Output voltage ............... Binary in 0.1V increments

4) Alarm definition

5) Special monitoring ......... Monitored data selected by instruction code HF3

6) Inverter status

! Forward running

! Reverse running

! Running (RUN)*

! Up to frequency (SU)*

! Overload (OL)


! Alarm*

The output signals marked * can be changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection).





! Forward rotation (STF) ! Middle speed (RM)*


! Low speed (RL)*

! High speed (RH)*


The input signals marked * can be changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 (input terminal function selection). Note that some signals do not accept the command from the PLC according to the setting.

53

CC-Link


The running frequency is written from the PLC to the inverter when it is changed ..... Binary in 0.01Hz increments


2

PROM or RAM.







Alarm Location

Inverter alarm

Communication alarm (FR-E5NC)

Description

Inverter operation

Data communication

FR-E5NC

Inverter operation

Data communication

FR-E5NC

PU operation

Stop

(Inverter trip)

Continued

Continued

Stop

Operation Mode


Stop

(Inverter trip)

Stop

(Inverter trip)

Continued

Continued

Stop

Continued

Stop

(Inverter trip)

Stop




Check the LED states of the FR-E5NC and remove the cause.



When a communication error occurs, the error message "E.OPT" appears.

4) Inverter reset


PU operation

Operation Mode


PLC program


(Instruction code)


(RY1A) (Note 2)



Disallowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Note 1.


Note 2.


Note 3.


Note 4.

The inverter is set to the external operation mode if it has been reset in the CC-Link operation mode.

To resume the CC-Link operation, therefore, the inverter must be switched to the CC-Link operation again. (Switching is not needed when "1" is set in Pr. 340 "link start mode selection".)

54

2.8 PLC Programming

CC-Link

2.8 PLC Programming

(1) I/O signal lists

The following device numbers are those of station 1.

Different device numbers are used for station 2 and later. (Refer to page 60 for the device number correspondence table.)

1) Output signals (Master module to inverter)

The output signals from the master module are given below. (Input signals to the inverter)

Device

No.

Signal Name

FR-A5NC

FR-E520 KN

FR-E5NC

Description Remarks

RY0

RY1


Reserve rotation command

OFF: Stop command

ON: Forward rotation start

OFF: Stop command

ON: Reserve rotation start

Switching RY0 and RY1 on at the same time gives a stop command.

RY2

RY3

RY4

RY5

RY6

RY7

RY8

RH terminal function

(high speed)

RM terminal function

(middle speed)

RL terminal function (low speed)

JOG terminal function

RT terminal function Unused (Note 2)

AU terminal function

CS terminal function

Output halt (MRS)

Functions assigned to RH/RM/RL are selected.

In the factory setting, multi-speed selection can be made by the combination of RH, RM and RL.

Function assigned to the JOG terminal is selected.

Function assigned to the RT terminal is selected.

Function assigned to the AU terminal is selected.

Function assigned to the CS terminal is selected.

When the MRS signal switches on, the inverter output stops.

The input signal functions can be changed. (Note

1)

RY9

RYA

RYB

Unused (Note 2) Reserved for the system.

RYC

RYD

RYE

RYF

Monitor command

Frequency setting command

(RAM)

Frequency setting command

(E

2

PROM)

Instruction code execution request

When the monitor command (RYC) is switched on, the monitored value is set to remote register RWR0 and monitoring (RXC) switches on. While the monitor command (RYC) is on, the monitored value is always updated.

When the frequency setting command (RYD) is switched on, the set frequency (RWW1) is written to the inverter. (Note 3)

On completion of write, frequency setting completion (RXD) switches on.

When the frequency setting command (RYE) is switched on, the set frequency (RW

W1

) is written to the inverter.

On completion of write, frequency setting completion (RXE) switches on.

When the instruction code execution request (RYC) is switched on, processing corresponding to the instruction code set to RW

W2 is executed. After completion of instruction code execution, instruction code execution completion (RXC) switches on. When an instruction code execution error occurs, a value other than 0 is set to the reply code (RW

R2

).

Do not switch on

RYD, RYE and

RYF at the same time. If they are switched on simultaneously, only one of them is executed.

Hence, switch on

RYD, RYE and

RYF one by one.

RY10

RY11

RY12

RY13

RY14

RY15

RY16

RY17

RY18

RY19


RY1A Error reset request flag

When the error reset request flag (RY1A) is switched on at the occurrence of an inverter fault, the inverter is reset and the error status flag (RX1A) switches off.

RY1B

RY1C

RY1D

RY1E

RY1F


Note 1.

The assignable device numbers change with the inverter model.

When the FR-A5NC (FR-A500, F500 series) is used, RY2 to RY8 can be changed with Pr. 180 to Pr.

186.

When the FR-E520KN or FR-E5NC is used, RY2 to RY4 and RY9 can be changed with Pr. 180 to Pr. 183.

Note 2.

Turn off the unused input signals. (Enter 0)

Note 3.

While the set frequency command (RYD) is on, the set frequency (RW

W1

) value is always reflected.

55

CC-Link

2) Input signals (Inverter to master module)

The input signals to the master module are given below. (Output signals from the inverter)

Device

No.

FR-

A5NC

Signal Name

FR-E520-

FR-E5NC

KN Description

RX0

RX1

RX2

RX3

RX4

RX5

RX6

Forward running

Reverse running

Running (RUN)

Up to frequency (SU)

Overload (OL)

Instantane ous power failure

(IPF)

Unused

Frequency detection (FU)

Remarks

OFF: Other than forward running (during stop or reverse rotation)

ON: Forward running

OFF: Other than reverse running (during stop or forward rotation)

ON: Reverse running

On while the inverter is running.

Switched on when the output frequency reaches the set frequency ± Pr.

41.

Switched on when stall prevention operation is performed, switched off when stall prevention is canceled.

Switched on when instantaneous power failure or undervoltage occurs.

Outputs can be changed.

(Note 1)

RX7 Alarm (ABC)

Switched on when the output frequency reaches any set frequency.

Switched on when the inverter's protective function is activated to stop the output.

RX8

RX9

RXA

RXB

Unused Reserved for the system.

RXC

RXD

RXE

RXF

Monitoring

Frequency setting completion (RAM)

Frequency setting completion (E

2

PROM)

Instruction code execution completion

Switched on when the monitored value is set by the monitor command

(RYC) switched on. Switched off when the monitor command (RYC) is switched off.

Switched on when the set frequency is written to the inverter by the frequency setting command (RYD) switched on. Switched off when the frequency setting command (RYD) is switched off.

Switched on when the set frequency is written to the inverter by the frequency setting command (RYE) switched on. Switched off when the frequency setting command (RYE) is switched off.

Switched on on completion of the processing corresponding to the instruction code (RW

W2

) which is executed when the instruction code execution request (RYF) switches on. Switched off when the instruction code execution completion (RXF) is switched off.

RX10

RX11

RX12

RX13

RX14

RX15

RX16

RX17

RX18

RX19


RX1A

RX1B

Error status flag

Remote station ready

Switched on when an inverter error occurs (protective function is activated).

Switched on when the inverter goes into the ready status on completion of initial setting after power-on or hardware reset. (Used as an interlock for read/write from/to the master station.) Switched off at inverter error occurrence (when protective function is activated).

RX1C

RX1D

RX1E

RX1F


Note 1.

The assignable device numbers change with the inverter model.

When the FR-A5NC (FR-A500, F500 series) is used, RX2 to RX7 can be changed with Pr. 190 to Pr.

195.

When the FR-E520KN or FR-E5NC is used, RX2, RX6 and RY7 can be changed with Pr. 190 to

Pr. 192.

Note 2.

When you set to ON the "data link fault station's input data status (SW4)" condition setting switch of the master module, the input data from the data link fault station is retained in the status at the time of alarm occurrence. Hence, note that if an inverter error occurs, the remote station ready and other signals remain ON.

56

CC-Link

3) Remote registers (Master module to inverter)

Device

No.

Signal Name

RW

W0

RW

W1

RW

W2

RW

W3

Monitor code

Set frequency

Instruction code

Write data

Description

Set the monitor code (refer to page 57) to be referred to. By switching on the

RYC signal after setting, the specified monitored data is set to RW

R0

.

Specify the set frequency. At this time, whether it is written to RAM or E

2

PROM is differentiated by the RYD and RYE signals. After setting the frequency to this register, switch on the above RYD or RYE to write the frequency. On completion of frequency write, RXD or RXE switches on in response to the input command.

Set the instruction code (refer to page 59) for execution of operation mode rewrite, Pr. read/write, error reference, error clear, etc. The corresponding instruction is executed by switching on RYF after completion of register setting.

RXF switches on completion of instruction execution.

Set the data specified by the above instruction code. (When required)

Switch RYF on after setting the above instruction code and this register.

Set zero when the write code is not required.

4) Remote registers (Inverter to master module)

Device

No.

Signal Name

RW

R0

RW

R1

Monitored value

Output frequency

Description

The monitored value specified by RW

W0

(monitor code) is set.

The present output frequency is always set.

RW

R2

RW

R3

Reply code

Read data

The reply code (refer to page 59) corresponding to RW

W2

(instruction code) is set. 0 is set for a normal reply and a value other than 0 is set for a data error.

For a normal reply, the reply data to the instruction specified by the instruction code is set.

(2) Code list

1) Monitor codes

<When FR-A5NC is connected>

Code Number

0000

H

0001

H

0002

H

0003

H

0004

H

0005

H

0006

H

0007

H

000F

H

0010

H

0011

H

0012

H

0013

H

0014

H

0015

H

0016

H

0008

H

0009

H

000A

H

000B

H

000C

H

000D

H

000E

H

0017

H

0018

H

0019

H

Description

No monitoring (monitored value fixed to 0)

Output frequency

Output current

Output voltage


Frequency setting

Running speed

Motor torque

Converter output voltage

Regenerative brake duty factor

Electronic overcurrent protection load factor

Output current peak value

Converter output voltage peak value

Input power

Output power

Input terminal status

Output terminal status

Load meter

Motor exciting current

Position pulse (Note 1)

Cumulative energization time


Orientation status (Note 1)

Actual operation time

Motor load factor

Cumulative power

Note 1.

Valid only when the FR-A5AP and FR-A5AX options are mounted.

Remarks

Remarks

Increments

——

0.01Hz

0.01A

0.1V

——

0.01Hz

1r/min

0.1%

0.1V

0.1%

0.1%

0.01A

0.1V

0.01kW

0.01kW

——

——

0.1%

0.01A

1 pulse

1hr

——

——

1hr

0.1%

1kWh

57

CC-Link

! Input terminal status monitoring details b15 b8 b7 b0

Empty “0”

STF

STR

AU

RT

RL

RM

RH

JOG

MRS

STOP

RES

CS

! Output terminal status monitoring details b15 b8 b7 b0

Empty “0”

Inverter running (RUN)


Instantaneous power failure (IPF)

Overload (OL)


Alarm

In the input and output terminal statuses, 0 indicates OFF and 1 ON.

<For FR-E520KN or when FR-E5NC is connected>

Code Number

0000

H

0001

H

0002

H

0003

H

Description


Output frequency (Note 1)

Output current

Output voltage

Increments

•

0.01Hz

0.01A

0.1V

Note 1.

The increments are 1 (integer data) when other than 0 is set in Pr. 37 "speed display" to choose the speed display.

58

CC-Link

2) Instruction codes

Item

Code

Number

Description

Operation mode read

Operation mode write

007B

H

00FB

H

0000

H

: CC-Link operation

0001

H

: External operation (Note 1)

0002

H

: PU operation

0000

H

: CC-Link operation

0001

H

: External operation (Note 1)

Error history No. 1, No. 2 read




Set frequency (RAM) read

Set frequency (E

2

PROM) read

Set frequency (RAM) write

Set frequency (E

2

PROM) write

0074

H

0075

H

0076

H

0077

H

006D

H

006E

H

00ED

H

00EE

H

Reads the most recent No. 1 and 2 errors.




Reads the set frequency (RAM).

Reads the set frequency (E

2

PROM).

Writes the set frequency to RAM.

Writes the set frequency to E

2

PROM.

Parameter read

Parameter write

0000

H

to

006C

H

0080

H

to

00EC

H

00F4

H

Used with link parameter expansion setting to access Pr. 0 to Pr. 999.

Refer to Appendices for the code numbers.

Note that some parameters are inaccessible.

Batch alarm definition clear

All parameter clear

Inverter reset


Second parameter changing

Read

Write

Read

Write

00FC

H

00FD

H

007F

H

00FF

H

006C

H

00EC

H

9696

H

: Batch-clears the alarm history.

9696

H

: Parameter clear (reset to factory settings with the exception of calibration values)

9966

H

: All parameter clear

9669

H

: Parameter user clear (FR-A5NC only)

9696

H

: Resets the inverter.

Changes the 0000

H

to 006C

H

and 0080

H

to 00EC

H

parameter values.

0000

H

: Pr.0 to Pr.99

0001

H

: Pr.100 to 159, Pr.200 to 231, Pr.900 to 905

0002

H

: Pr.160 to 199, Pr.232 to Pr.285

0003

H

: Pr.300 to 399

0009

H

: Pr.922, Pr.923, Pr.990, Pr.991

Pr.201 to 230

0000

H

: Running frequency

0001

H

: Time

0002

H

: Rotation direction

Pr.902 to 905

0000

H

: Offset/gain

0001

H

: Analog

0002

H

: Analog value of terminal

Note 1.

Not available for the FR-E520KN.

Remarks

Setting can be made from the remote register.

3) Reply codes

After performing frequency setting (RYD, RYE) or instruction code execution (RYF), check the reply code (RW

R2

) of the remote register.

Data

0000

H

0001

H

0002

H

0003

H

Normal

Item

Write mode error

Parameter selection error

Setting range error

Alarm Definition

Normal completion of instruction code execution

An attempt was made to write parameters other than during stop in the

CC-Link operation mode.

Code number not registered was set.

Set data is outside the permissible data range.

59

CC-Link

(3) Buffer memory


! Output states to remote device stations are stored.

! Outputs for 2 words are used per station.

Master station


(Station 1: 1 station occupied)

List for Correspondence between Master Station Buffer

Memory Addresses and Station Numbers

Address

For station 1

For station 2

For station 3

For station 4

For station 5

For station 6

For station 7

For station 8

For station 9

For station 63

For station 64

172

H to

1DB

H

1DC

H

1DD

H

1DE

H

1DF

H

16C

H

16D

H

16E

H

16F

H

170

H

171

H

164

H

165

H

166

H

167

H

168

H

169

H

16A

H

16B

H

160

H

161

H

162

H

163

H

Remote outputs (RY)

RY F to RY 0

RY 1F to RY 10

RY 2F to RY 20

RY 3F to RY 30

RY 4F to RY 40

RY 5F to RY 50

RY 6F to RY 60

RY 7F to RY 70

RY 8F to RY 80

RY 9F to RY 90

RY AF to RY A0

RY BF to RY B0

RY CF to RY C0

RY DF to RY D0

RY EF to RY E0

RY FF to RY F0

RY10F to RY100

RY11F to RY110 to

RY7CF to RY7C0

RY7DF to RY7D0

RY7EF to RY7E0

RY7FF to RY7F0

RY 0F to RY 00

RY 1F to RY 10

Buffer

Memory

Address

Buffer

Memory

Address

Buffer

Memory

Address

Buffer

Memory

Address

1 160

H

to 161

H

17 180

H

to 181

H

33 1A0

H

to 1A1

H

49 1C0

H

to 1C1

H

2 162

H

to 163

H

18 182

H

to 183

H

34 1A2

H

to 1A3

H

50 1C2

H

to 1C3

H

3 164

H

to 165

H

19 184

H

to 185

H

35 1A4

H

to 1A5

H

51 1C4

H

to 1C5

H

4 166

H

to 167

H

20 186

H

to 187

H

36 1A6

H

to 1A7

H

52 1C6

H

to 1C7

H

5 168

H

to 169

H

21 188

H

to 189

H

37 1A8

H

to 1A9

H

53 1C8

H

to 1C9

H

6 16A

H

to 16B

H

22 18A

H

to 18B

H

38 1AA

H

to 1AB

H

54 1CA

H

to 1CB

H

7 16C

H

to 16D

H

23 18C

H

to 18D

H

39 1AC

H

to 1AD

H

55 1CC

H

to 1CD

H

8 16E

H

to 16F

H

24 18E

H

to 18F

H

40 1AE

H

to 1AF

H

56 1CE

H

to 1CF

H

9 170

H

to 171

H

25 190

H

to 191

H

41 1B0

H

to 1B1

H

57 1D0

H

to 1D1

H

10 172

H

to 173

H

26 192

H

to 193

H

42 1B2

H

to 1B3

H

58 1D2

H

to 1D3

H

11 174

H

to 175

H

27 194

H

to 195

H

43 1B4

H

to 1B5

H

59 1D4

H

to 1D5

H

12 176

H

to 177

H

28 196

H

to 197

H

44 1B6

H

to 1B7

H

60 1D6

H

to 1D7

H

13 178

H

to 179

H

29 198

H

to 199

H

45 1B8

H

to 1B9

H

61 1D8

H

to 1D9

H

14 17A

H

to 17B

H

30 19A

H

to 19B

H

46 1BA

H

to 1BB

H

62 1DA

H

to 1DB

H

15 17C

H

to 17D

H

31 19C

H

to 19D

H

47 1BC

H

to 1BD

H

63 1DC

H

to 1DD

H

16 17E

H

to 17F

H

32 19E

H

to 19F

H

48 1BE

H

to 1BF

H

64 1DE

H

to 1DF

H


! Input states from remote device stations are stored.

! Inputs for 2 words are used per station.

Master station


(Station 1: 1 station occupied)

List for Correspondence between Master Station Buffer

Memory Addresses and Station Numbers

Address

For station 1

For station 2

For station 3

For station 4

For station 5

For station 6

For station 7

For station 8

For station 9

For station 63

For station 64 to

15B

H

15C

H

15D

H

15E

H

15F

H

E8

H

E9

H

EA

H

EB

H

EC

H

ED

H

EE

H

EF

H

E0

H

E1

H

E2

H

E3

H

E4

H

E5

H

E6

H

E7

H

F0

H

F1

H

F2

H

Remote inputs (RX)

RX F to RX 0

RX 1F to RX 10

RX 2F to RX 20

RX 3F to RX 30

RX 4F to RX 40

RX 5F to RX 50

RX 6F to RX 60

RX 7F to RX 70

RX 8F to RX 80

RX 9F to RX 90

RX AF to RX A0

RX BF to RX B0

RX CF to RX C0

RX DF to RX D0

RX EF to RX E0

RX FF to RX F0

RX10F to RX100

RX11F to RX110 to

RX7CF to RX7C0

RX7DF to RX7D0

RX7EF to RX7E0

RX7FF to RX7F0

RX 0F to RX 00

RX 1F to RX 10

Buffer

Memory

Address

Buffer

Memory

Address

Buffer

Memory

Address

Buffer

Memory

Address

1 E0

H

to E1

H

17 100

H

to 101

H

33 120

H

to 121

H

49 140

H

to 141

H

2 E2

H

to E3

H

18 102

H

to 103

H

34 122

H

to 123

H

50 142

H

to 143

H

3 E4

H

to E5

H

19 104

H

to 105

H

35 124

H

to 125

H

51 144

H

to 145

H

4 E6

H

to E7

H

20 106

H

to 107

H

36 126

H

to 127

H

52 146

H

to 147

H

5 E8

H

to E9

H

21 108

H

to 109

H

37 128

H

to 129

H

53 148

H

to 149

H

6 EA

H

to EB

H

22 10A

H

to 10B

H

38 12A

H

to 12B

H

54 14A

H

to 14B

H

7 EC

H

to ED

H

23 10C

H

to 10D

H

39 12C

H

to 12D

H

55 14C

H

to 14D

H

8 EE

H

to EF

H

24 10E

H

to 10F

H

40 12E

H

to 12F

H

56 14E

H

to 14F

H

9 F0

H

to F1

H

25 110

H

to 111

H

41 130

H

to 131

H

57 150

H

to 151

H

10 F2

H

to F3

H

26 112

H

to 113

H

42 132

H

to 133

H

58 152

H

to 153

H

11 F4

H

to F5

H

27 114

H

to 115

H

43 134

H

to 135

H

59 154

H

to 155

H

12 F6

H

to F7

H

28 116

H

to 117

H

44 136

H

to 137

H

60 156

H

to 157

H

13 F8

H

to F9

H

29 118

H

to 119

H

45 138

H

to 139

H

61 158

H

to 159

H

14 FA

H

to FB

H

30 11A

H

to 11B

H

46 13A

H

to 13B

H

62 15A

H

to 15B

H

15 FC

H

to FD

H

31 11C

H

to 11D

H

47 13C

H

to 13D

H

63 15C

H

to 15D

H

16 FE

H

to FF

H

32 11E

H

to 11F

H

48 13E

H

to 13F

H

64 15E

H

to 15F

H

60

CC-Link

3) Remote registers (Master module to inverter)

! Data sent to remote registers (RW

W

) of remote device stations are stored.

! Outputs for 4 words are used per station.


Master station (Station 1: 1 station occupied)

List for Correspondence between Master Station Buffer

Memory Addresses and Station Numbers

Address

For station 1

For station 2

For station 3

For station 4

1E0

H

1E1

H

1E2

H

1E3

H

1E4

H

1E5

H

1E6

H

1E7

H

Remote registers (RW

W

)

RW

W

0

RW

W

1

1E8

H

1E9

H

1EA

H

1EB

H

1EC

H

1ED

H

1EE

H

1EF

H

1F0

H

RW

RW

RW

RW

RW

RW

RW

RW

RW

RW

RW

RW

RW

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

W

RW

W

W

W

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F to

For station 64

2DB

H

2DC

H

2DD

H

2DE

H

2DF

H to

RW

W

FC

RW

W

FD

RW

W

FE

RW

W

FF

RW

W

0

RW

W

1

RW

W

2

RW

W

3

Buffer

Memory

Address

Buffer

Memory

Address

Buffer

Memory

Address

Buffer

Memory

Address

1 1E0

H

to 1E3

H

17 220

H

to 223

H

33 260

H

to 263

H

49 2A0

H

to 2A3

H

2 1E4

H

to 1E7

H

18 224

H

to 227

H

34 264

H

to 267

H

50 2A4

H

to 2A7

H

3 1E8

H

to 1EB

H

19 228

H

to 22B

H

35 268

H

to 26B

H

51 2A8

H

to 2AB

H

4 1EC

H

to 1EF

H

20 22C

H

to 22F

H

36 26C

H

to 26F

H

52 2AC

H

to 2AF

H

5 1F0

H

to 1F3

H

21 230

H

to 233

H

37 270

H

to 273

H

53 2B0

H

to 2B3

H

6 1F4

H

to 1F7

H

22 234

H

to 237

H

38 274

H

to 277

H

54 2B4

H

to 2B7

H

7 1F8

H

to 1FB

H

23 238

H

to 23B

H

39 278

H

to 27B

H

55 2B8

H

to 2BB

H

8 1FC

H

to 1FF

H

24 23C

H

to 23F

H

40 27C

H

to 27F

H

56 2BC

H

to 2BF

H

9 200

H

to 203

H

25 240

H

to 243

H

41 280

H

to 283

H

57 2C0

H

to 2C3

H

10 204

H

to 207

H

26 244

H

to 247

H

42 284

H

to 287

H

58 2C4

H

to 2C7

H

11 208

H

to 20B

H

27 248

H

to 24B

H

43 288

H

to 28B

H

59 2C8

H

to 2CB

H

12 20C

H

to 20F

H

28 24C

H

to 24F

H

44 28C

H

to 28F

H

60 2CC

H

to 2CF

H

13 210

H

to 213

H

29 250

H

to 253

H

45 290

H

to 293

H

61 2D0

H

to 2D3

H

14 214

H

to 217

H

30 254

H

to 257

H

46 294

H

to 297

H

62 2D4

H

to 2D7

H

15 218

H

to 21B

H

31 258

H

to 25B

H

47 298

H

to 29B

H

63 2D8

H

to 2DB

H

16 21C

H

to 21F

H

32 25C

H

to 25F

H

48 29C

H

to 29F

H

64 2DC

H

to 2DF

H

4) Remote registers (Inverter to master module)

! Data sent from remote registers (RW

R

) of remote device stations are stored.

! Inputs for 4 words are used per station.


Master station (Station 1: 1 station occupied)

List for Correspondence between Master Station Buffer

Memory Addresses and Station Numbers

Address

For station 1

For station 2

For station 3

For station 4

2E8

H

2E9

H

2EA

H

2EB

H

2EC

H

2ED

H

2EE

H

2EF

H

2F0

H

2E0

H

2E1

H

2E2

H

2E3

H

2E4

H

2E5

H

2E6

H

2E7

H

Remote registers (RW

R

)

RW

R

0

RW

R

1

RW

R

2

RW

R

3

RW

R

4

RW

R

5

RW

R

6

RW

R

7

RW

R

8

RW

R

9

RW

R

A

RW

R

B

RW

R

C

RW

R

D

RW

R

E

RW

R

F to

For station 64

3DB

H

3DC

H

3DD

H

3DE

H

3DF

H to

RW

R

FC

RW

R

FD

RW

R

FE

RW

R

FF

RW

R

0

RW

R

1

RW

R

2

RW

R

3

Buffer

Memory

Address

Buffer

Memory

Address

Buffer

Memory

Address

Buffer

Memory

Address

1 2E0

H

to 2E3

H

17 320

H

to 323

H

33 360

H

to 363

H

49 3A0

H

to 3A3

H

2 2E4

H

to 2E7

H

18 324

H

to 327

H

34 364

H

to 367

H

50 3A4

H

to 3A7

H

3 2E8

H

to 2EB

H

19 328

H

to 32B

H

35 368

H

to 36B

H

51 3A8

H

to 3AB

H

4 2EC

H

to 2EF

H

20 32C

H

to 32F

H

36 36C

H

to 36F

H

52 3AC

H

to 3AF

H

5 2F0

H

to 2F3

H

21 330

H

to 333

H

37 370

H

to 373

H

53 3B0

H

to 3B3

H

6 2F4

H

to 2F7

H

22 334

H

to 337

H

38 374

H

to 377

H

54 3B4

H

to 3B7

H

7 2F8

H

to 2FB

H

23 338

H

to 33B

H

39 378

H

to 37B

H

55 3B8

H

to 3BB

H

8 2FC

H

to 2FF

H

24 33C

H

to 33F

H

40 37C

H

to 37F

H

56 3BC

H

to 3BF

H

9 300

H

to 303

H

25 340

H

to 343

H

41 380

H

to 383

H

57 3C0

H

to 3C3

H

10 304

H

to 307

H

26 344

H

to 347

H

42 384

H

to 387

H

58 3C4

H

to 3C7

H

11 308

H

to 30B

H

27 348

H

to 34B

H

43 388

H

to 38B

H

59 3C8

H

to 3CB

H

12 30C

H

to 30F

H

28 34C

H

to 34F

H

44 38C

H

to 38F

H

60 3CC

H

to 3CF

H

13 310

H to 313

H

29 350

H

to 353

H

45 390

H

to 393

H

61 3D0

H

to 3D3

H

14 314

H

to 317

H

30 354

H

to 357

H

46 394

H

to 397

H

62 3D4

H

to 3D7

H

15 318

H

to 31B

H

31 358

H

to 35B

H

47 398

H

to 39B

H

63 3D8

H

to 3DB

H

16 31C

H

to 31F

H

32 35C

H

to 35F

H

48 39C

H

to 39F

H

64 3DC

H

to 3DF

H

61

CC-Link

(4) Programming examples

This section gives the program examples used to control the inverter with the sequence programs.

1)

6)

7)

8)

9)

2)

3)

4)

5)

Item

Inverter status read

Operation mode setting

Operation command setting

Monitor function setting

Parameter read

Parameter write


Alarm definition read

Inverter reset

Program Example

Reads the inverter status from the master station buffer memory.

Sets the CC-Link operation mode.

Commands the forward rotation and mid-speed signals.

Monitors the output frequency.

Reads Pr. 7 "acceleration time".

Sets "3.0 seconds" in Pr. 7 "acceleration time".

Sets to 50.00Hz.

Reads the inverter alarm.

Make an inverter reset.

System configuration of programming examples

PLC

Power supply

CPU

Master station

(X/Y00 to 1F)

Input module

(X20 to 2F)

Station 1

Inverter


CC-Link

X0020

Station 2

Inverter


CC-Link

Refer To

63

65

66

67

68

63

64

64

65

62

CC-Link

1) Inverter status reading program example

Write a program as explained below to read the inverter status from the master station buffer memory.

The following program reads the inverter status of station 1 to M0-M7:

X0000 X000F X0001

H H K

FROM 0000 00E0 D0 1

K2

MOV D0 M0

Reads the remote input data of buffer memory to D0.

Stores b0-b7 (status) in D0 to M0-M7.

Address of master module buffer memory

Station 1

E0

E1

H

H

Station 2

E2

H

E3

H

Remote input

RXF to RX0

RX1F to RX10

RX2F to RX20

RX3F to RX30

FROM instruction

D0 b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

0 0 0 0

* * * *

0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1

Station 64

15E

H

15F

H

RX7EF to RX7E0

RX7FF to RX7F0

Note 1. Shaded portion indicates

addresses of one inverter.

Note 2. *: 0 or 1 because of unused bit.

Note 3. Unavailable for use with

FR-E520- KN or FR-E5NC.

RXF to RX8 [Inverter status]

Up to frequency

Running Forward running

MOV instruction

Inverter status

M0: Forward running

M1: Reverse running

M2: Running (RUN)

M3: Up to frequency (SU)

M4: Overload (OL)

M5: Instantaneous power

failure (IPF) (Note 3)

M6: Frequency detection

(FU)

M7: Alarm

M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1

Inverter status

Example: The above indicates up to

frequency during forward running.

2) Operation mode setting program example

Write a program as explained below to write various data to the inverters.

The following program changes the operation mode of station 2 inverter to CC-Link operation.

Operation mode writing code number: 00FB

H

(hexadecimal) (Refer to page 59)

CC-Link operation set data: 0000

H

(hexadecimal) (Refer to page 59)

The reply code at the time of instruction code execution is set to D2. (Refer to page 59)

M9036

26

36

X0000 X000F X0001 X0020 M202

M302 Write setting

44

Inverter running

H

FROM 0000

M303

46

H

00E2

K4 K

M200 2

PLS

SET

M302

M303

H

MOV 00FB D100

Reads the remote input (RX20 to RX3F) data of buffer memory to M200-M231.

TO

H

0000

H

MOV 0000 D101

H

01E6

K

D100 2

Writes operation mode write code (FB

H

) to

RW

W6

and set data (0000

H

) to RW

W7

.

67

M215

H

FROM 0000

H

02E6

SET M115

D2

K

1

RST M115

Switches on the instruction code execution request (RY2F).

Reads the reply code (RW

R6

) to D2 when the instruction code execution completion

(RX2F) switches on.

Switches off the instruction code execution request (RY2F).

88

M9036

TO

H

0000

H

0162

RST M303

K4

M100

K

2

Writes M100-M131 data to the remote outputs (RY20 to RY3F) of buffer memory.

63

CC-Link

3) Operation command setting program example

Write a program as explained below to write the inverter operation commands to the master station buffer memory.

The inverter is operated in accordance with the operation commands written to the remote outputs (addresses 160

H to 1DF

H

).

The following program gives the commands of forward rotation and middle speed signals to the inverter of station 2:

26

X0000 X000F X0001

SET M100 Forward rotation command (RY20)

TO

H

0000

H

0162

SET M103

K4 K

M100 1

M115

0 0 0 0

*

M110

*

M105 M100

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

TO instruction

Middle-speed command (RY23)

Writes the operation commands to buffer memory and outputs to the inverter.

Address

160

H

161

H

162

H

163

H

RY0F to RY00

RY1F to RY10

RY2F to RY20

RY3F to RY30

Station 1

Station 2

RY2F to RY2A [Operation commands]

Forward

Note 1. *: 0 or 1 because of unused bit

Note 2. Unavailable for use with FR-E520- KN or FR-E5NC.

rotation

RY2F to RY2A

...

...

...

...

1: ON

0: OFF

1DE

H

1DF

H

Operation commands

...

(RAM)

...

(EEPROM)

...

request

RY7EF to RY7E0

RY7FF to RY7F0

...

...

...

...

Station 64

4) Output frequency monitoring program example

Write a program as explained below to read the monitor function of the inverter.

The following program reads the output frequency of station 2 inverter to D1.

Output frequency reading code number: 0001

H

(hexadecimal)

Example: The data indicated is 1770

H

(600) at the output frequency of 60Hz.

26

M9036

X0000 X000F X0001 X0020

36

Read setting

65

M9036

X0000 X000F X0001 X0020

75

M212

H

FROM 0000

H

00E2

K4

M200

K

2

TO

H

0000

H

MOV 0001 D100

H

01E4

K

D100 1

H

FROM 0000

TO

H

0000

H

02E4

SET M112

D1

K

1

H

0162

K4

M100

K

2

RST M112


Sets the monitor code (01

H

) of the output frequency to RW

W4

.

Switches on the monitor command (RY2C).

Reads the output frequency (RW

R4

) data to D1 when M212: monitoring

(RX2C) switches on.


Monitoring stop.

64

CC-Link

5) Parameter reading program example

The following program reads the Pr. 7 "acceleration time" setting of station 2 inverter to D1.

Pr. 7 "acceleration time" reading code number: 07

H

(hexadecimal)

For the parameter code numbers, refer to Appendices.


26

M9036

X0000 X000F X0001 X0020

36

M302 Read setting

43

M303

45

H

FROM 0000

H

00E2

K4 K

M200 2

TO

PLS M302

H

0000

SET M303

H

MOV 0007 D100

H

01E6

K

D100 1


Writes Pr. 7 read code (07

H

) to RWw6.

61

M215

H

FROM 0000

H

FROM 0000

H

02E7

SET M115

D1

K

1

H

02E6 D2

K

1

RST M115


"Reads the acceleration time (RW

R7

) and reply code (RW

R6

) to D1 and D2" when

M215: instruction code execution completion (RX2F) switches on.


82

M9036

TO

H

0000

H

0162

RST M303

K4

M100

K

2


Note: For the parameters of number 100 and later, change the link parameter expansion setting (to other than

0000

H

).

6) Parameter writing program example

The following program changes the Pr. 7 acceleration time setting of station 2 inverter to 3.0 seconds.

Acceleration time writing code number: 87

H

(hexadecimal)

Acceleration time set data: K30 (decimal)

For the parameter code numbers, refer to Appendix.


26

M9036

X0000 X000F X0001 X0020

36

M302 Write setting

43

M303

45

H

FROM 0000

H

00E2

K4 K

M200 2

PLS M302

SET M303

H

MOV 0087 D100

K

MOV 0030 D101

H

TO 0000

H

01E6

K

D100 2


Writes Pr. 7 (87

H

) to RWW6 and acceleration time setting data (K30) to RWW7.

M215 H

FROM 0000

H

02E6

SET M115

D2

K

1

RST M115


Reads the replay code (RW

R6

) to D2 when the instruction code execution completion (RX2F) switches on.


87

M9036

H

TO 0000

H

0162

RST M303

K4

M100

K

2

Writes M100-M131 data to the remote outputs

(RY20 to RY3F) of buffer memory.

Note 1.

For the parameters of number 100 and later, change the link parameter expansion setting (to other than 0000

H

).

Note 2.

For other functions, refer to the instruction codes (page 59).

65

CC-Link

7) Running frequency setting program example

The following program changes the running frequency of station 2 inverter to 50.00Hz.

Set frequency : K5000 (decimal)


26

M9036

X0000 X000F X0001 X0020

36

M302 Write setting

43

M303

45

H

FROM 0000

H

00E2

K4 K

M200 2

TO

PLS M302

SET M303

K

MOV 5000 D100

H

0000

H

01E5

K

D100 1


Writes set data to RW

W5

.

66

M213

H

FROM 0000

H

02E6

SET M113

D2

K

1

RST M113

Switches on the frequency setting command RAM (RY2D).

Reads the replay code (RW

R6

) to D2 when the frequency setting completion

(RX2D) switches on.

Switches off the frequency setting command (RY2D).

82

M9036

TO

H

0000

H

0162

RST M303

K4

M100

K

2


! To continuously change the running frequency from PLC

When the frequency setting completion (example: RX2D) switches on, make sure that the reply code in the remote register is 0000

H

and change the set data (example: RW

W5

) continuously.

! Program example for writing data to E 2

PROM

Modify the above program as follows:

Frequency setting command RX2D RX2E.

Frequency setting completion RX2D RX2E.

<Timing chart for write to RAM> <Timing chart for write to E 2 PROM>

RY2D RY2E

Note 1.

RWw

5

RWw

5

Note 2.

Inverter running frequency

Inverter running frequency

Data change is reflected as soon as

RY2E switches on.

Note 1.

For E

2

PROM, write is made only once when RY2E is switched on.

Note 2.

If the set data is changed with RY2E on, it is not reflected on the inverter.

66

CC-Link

8) Alarm definition reading program example

The following program reads the alarm definition of station 2 inverter to D1.

Alarm definition reading code number: 74

H

(hexadecimal)


M9036

26

36

X0000 X000F X0001 X0020

M302 Read setting

43

M303

45

H

FROM 0000

H

00E2

K4 K

M200 2

PLS M302


Writes error history No. 1, No. 2 read code

(74

H

) to RW

W6

.

TO

H

0000

SET M303

H

MOV 0074 D100

H

01E6

K

D100 1

61

M215

H

FROM 0000

H

FROM 0000

H

02E7

SET M115

D1

K

1

H

02E6 D2

K

1

RST M115


Reads the alarm data (RW

R7

) and reply code

(RW

R6

) to D1 and D2 when the instruction code execution completion (RX2F) switches on.


82

M9036

TO

H

0000

H

0162

RST M303

K4

M100

K

2

Writes M100-M131 data to the remote outputs

(RY20 to RY3F) of buffer memory.

! Alarm definition display example

Example: Read data is 30A0

H

Previous alarm........... THT

Current alarm............. OPT b15 b8 b7 b0

0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

Previous alarm

(30

H

)

Current alarm

(A0

H

)

! Alarm data

For full information on alarm definitions, refer to the inverter manual.

The alarm definitions change with the inverter. For details, refer to the inverter manual.

Data

00

H

10

H

11

H

12

H

20

H

21

H

22

H

30

H

31

H

40

H

50

H

51

H

Definition

No alarm

OC1

OC2

OC3

OV1

OV2

OV3

THT

THM

FIN

IPF

UVT

Data

60

H

70

H

80

H

81

H

90

H

A0

H

A1

H

A2

H

A3

H

B0

H

B1

H

B2

H

Definition

OLT

BE

GF

LF

OHT

OPT

OP1

OP2

OP3

PE

PUE

RET

Data

C0

H

C1

H

C2

H

D5

H

D6

H

D7

H

D8

H

D9

H

DA

H

DB

H

F6

H

F7

H

Definition

CPU

CTE

P24

MB1

MB2

MB3

MB4

MB5

MB6

MB7

E6

E7

67

CC-Link

9) Inverter error-time inverter resetting program example

The following program resets the inverter of station 2.


(Refer to page 63 for the program example)

M9036

26

X0000 X000F X0001 M226

36

X0020

Write setting

H

FROM 0000

H

00E2

K4 K

M200 2

SET M126


Switches on the error reset request flag (RY1A).

SET M302

M302 M226

43

M9036

87

H

TO 0000

H

0162

RST M126

K4

M100

K

2

Switches off the error reset request flag

(RY1A) if the error status flag (RX1A) is off.


Note 1.

The above inverter reset using RY1A may be made only when an inverter error has occurred. The inverter may be reset in any operation mode.

Note 2.

When using the instruction code execution request (RYF) with the instruction code (FD

H

) and data

(9696

H

) to reset the inverter, make a reset and then change the operation mode to the CC-Link operation mode. (Refer to page 63 for the program example)


1) Since the buffer memory data of the master station is kept transferred (refreshed) to/from the inverters, the TO instruction need not be executed every scan in response to data write or read requests.

The execution of the TO instruction every scan does not pose any problem.

2) If the FROM/TO instruction is executed frequently, data may not be written securely.

When transferring data between the inverter and sequence program via the buffer memory, perform the handshake to make sure that the data has been written securely.

TO instruction

Write completion

TO instruction

Write completion

68

2.9 How to Check for Error with the LED Lamps

CC-Link

2.9 How to Check for Error with the LED Lamps

(1) When one inverter is connected

The following example indicates the causes and corrective actions for faults which may be judged from the LED states of the CC-Link unit on the inverter under the condition that the SW, M/S and PRM LEDs of the master module are off (the master module setting is proper) in the system configuration where one inverter is connected:

CPU Master module

Station 1

Inverter

L.RUN

SD

LED States

RD L.ERR

Cause

Normal communication is made but CRC error has occurred due to noise.

Normal communication

Hardware fault

Hardware fault

Cannot answer due to CRC error of receive data.

Data to be sent to the host station does not reach destination.

Hardware fault

Hardware fault

Polling response is made but refresh receive is in CRC error.

Hardware fault

Hardware fault

Hardware fault

Data to be sent to the host station is in CRC error.

There is no data to be sent to the host station, or data to be sent to the host station cannot be received due to noise.

Hardware fault

Cannot receive data due to open cable, etc.

Invalid baud rate or station number setting

Baud rate or station number changed during operation.

WDT error occurrence (hardware fault), power off, power supply failure

: On : Off : Flicker

69

CC-Link

(2) When multiple inverters are connected

The following example indicates the causes and corrective actions for faults which may be judged from the LED states of the CC-Link units of the inverters under the condition that the SW, M/S and PRM LEDs of the master unit are off (the master module setting is proper) in the system configuration shown below:

CPU Master module

Station 1

Inverter A

Station 2

Inverter B

Station 3

Inverter C

TIME

LINE or

TIME

LINE

LED States

Master Inverter (CC-Link) module Station 1 Station 2 Station 3

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

Normal

Cause

The transmission cable is shorted.

Corrective Action

——

Contact fault of inverter and CC-Link option unit

Fit the CC-Link option unit correctly.

Check the connector.

Since the L.RUN LEDs of station 2 and later are off, the transmission cable between the remote I/O units A and B is open or disconnected from the terminal block.

Referring to the LED "on" condition, search for an open point and repair.

Among the three wires of the transmission cable, search for the shorted wire and repair.

The transmission cable is wired improperly.

Check the wiring on the inverter terminal block and correct the improper wiring point.

: On, : Off, : Flicker, : Any of on, flicker and off

70

CC-Link

(3) When communication stops during operation

! Check that the CC-Link units and twisted pair cables are fitted properly. (Check for contact fault, open cable, etc.)

! Check that the PLC program is executed reliably and that the PLC CPU is running.

! Check that data communication is not stopped due to an instantaneous power failure, etc.

Master

LED States

Inverter (CC-Link)

Cause Corrective Action module

Station 1 Station 2 Station 3

TIME

LINE or

TIME

LINE

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

Since the L.RUN LEDs of stations 1 and 3 are off, the station numbers of the inverters set as stations 1 and 3 are the same.

After correcting the repeated station numbers of the inverters, switch power on again.

Since the L.RUN and SD LEDs of station 2 are off, the transmission speed setting of station 2 is wrong within the setting range (0 to 4).

After correcting the transmission speed setting, power on the inverter again.

Since the L.ERR LED of station 3 flickers, the setting switch of station 3 was moved during normal operation.

Return the setting switch of the inverter (CC-Link) to the original position and power on the inverter again.

Since the L.RUN and SD LEDs of station 1 are off and its L.ERR LED is on, the setting switch setting of station 1 is outside the range

(transmission speed: 5 to 9, station number: 65 or more).

After correcting the setting switch position of the inverter (CC-Link), switch power on again.

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

Since the L.ERR LED of station 2 is on, station 2 itself is affected by noise. (L.RUN may go off.)

Securely connect FG of each inverter and master module to ground.

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

Since the L.ERR LEDs of station 2 and later are on, the transmission cable between the inverters of stations 2 and 3 is affected by noise.

(L.RUN may go off.)

Check that the transmission cable is connected to SLD. Also run it as far away as possible from the power line. (100mm or more)

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

L.RUN

SD

RD

L.ERR

Termination resistors are left unconnected. (L.RUN may go off.) •

Check that the termination resistors are connected.

: On, : Off, : Flicker, : Any of on, flicker and off

71

2.10 Troubleshooting

CC-Link

2.10 Troubleshooting

(1) Operation mode unswitched to CC-Link

! Check that the twisted pair cables (and FR-A5NC or FR-E5NC) are fitted properly. (Check for contact fault, open cable, etc.)

! Check that the station number setting switches are set to the correct positions. (Check that the station number matches the program, the station numbers are not repeated, and the station number is not outside the range.)

! Check that the inverter is in the external operation mode.

! Check that the operation mode switching program is run.

! Check that the operation mode switching program has been written correctly.

(2) Inverter unstarted in CC-Link operation mode

! Check that the operation mode is set to the CC-Link operation mode.

! Check that the inverter starting program has been written correctly.

! Check that the inverter starting program is run.

! Check that the inverter is providing output.

(3) Operating and handling instructions

! During CC-Link operation, the inverter only accepts commands from the PLC and ignores any external operation command and any operation command from the parameter unit.

! If the same station number is set to different inverters, wrong data will be transferred and normal communication cannot be made.

! The inverter is brought to an alarm stop "E.OPT" or " E.OP3" if data communication stops, even instantaneously, due to a PLC fault, an open twisted pair cable or the like during CC-Link operation.

! If the PLC (master station) is reset or powered off during CC-Link operation, data communication stops and the inverter is brought to an alarm stop "E.OPT" or " E.OP3".

To reset the PLC (master station), switch the operation mode to the external operation once, then reset the PLC.

! When the FR-A5NC or FR-E5NC is used, any inverter whose main power is restored is reset to return to the external operation mode. To resume the CC-Link operation, therefore, set the operation mode to the CC-Link operation using the sequence program.

Note that setting "1" in Pr. 340 (link start mode) selects the CC-Link operation mode.

72

3.1•••••

Device Net

TM

3

Device Net

TM

3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 73

3.2 Specifications ........................................................................................................ 74

3.3 Structure................................................................................................................ 75

3.4 Configuration and Wiring Procedure ..................................................................... 77

3.5 Inverter Setting ...................................................................................................... 80

3.6 Operation Modes ................................................................................................... 84

3.7 Operational Functions ........................................................................................... 87

3.8 DeviceNet Programming ....................................................................................... 89

3.9 Object Map ............................................................................................................ 97

3.10 EDS File .............................................................................................................. 113

73

3.1 Overview

Device Net

TM

3.1 Overview

TM

Device Net

TM

was developed and released by Allen-Bradley Company, Inc. in 1994. ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor

Association, Inc.) is now operating the business since it became independent from Allen-Bradley in 1995. As an open field network, Device Net

TM

can connect versatile devices of third parties and is compatible with not only inverters but also various field-level applications.

Use of the configuration software enables nodes (devices to communicate with) to be assigned on a network to establish the communication configuration of specific devices.

(1) Features

Connection with the master module (personal computer/PLC) by communication cables allows inverters to be run and monitored and their parameter values to be read/written from a user program or configurator.

(2) Types of Device Net

TM

-compatible inverters

Inverter Series

FR-A500

FR-F500

Method for Compatibility with Device NetTM

Connect the FR-A5ND plug-in option.

Connect the FR-A5ND plug-in option.

(3) Instructions

0x given in the text indicates that the numeral that follows is a hexadecimal number.

73


Device Net

TM

3.2 Specifications

Item

Power supply

Standard

Network topology

Communication cable

Maximum cable length

Control power

External power input

Communication speed

Number of inverters connectable

Response time

Specifications

Supplied by the inverter.

Input voltage: 11 to 28V

Current consumption: Maximum 90mA

Conforms to ODVA DeviceNet Specification Release 2.0.

(independently tested by University of Michigan test lab, February, 1998)

Supports UCMM.

DeviceNet (linear bus with drop lines)

DeviceNet standard thick or thin cable

(Use a "thin" cable as the drop cable.)

500m(125kbps)

250m(250kbps)

100m(500kbps)

125kbps, 250kbps, 500kbps

64 inverters (including master) (Note)

Read request response time = 1ms

Write request response time = 30ms

Parameter clear, all parameter clear response time = 5 seconds

Note: When there is one master, the maximum number of inverters connected is 63 (64-1).

74

3.3 Structure

3.3 Structure

(1) Appearance

Mounting hole

Device Net

TM

Front view

AV1 CO2

V- C- SH

SW1

8

9

0 1

2

6 5

4

C+ V+

SW2

0

8

9

1

2

6 5

4

MNS

D2

DeviceNet connector

Status LED

Mounting hole

Node address setting switches

Status LED

DeviceNet connector


Mounting holes

Option connector

(2) Part names

Name


Status LED

Function

SW1

SW2

Used to set the node address of the inverter within the station range 0 to 63. Set the tens digit of the node address to SW1 and the units digit to SW2. Any setting other than 0 to 63 is regarded as 63.The node address setting switches are valid when ADDR of Pr. 345 is 63.

When ADDR of Pr. 345 is not 63, the node address setting switches are invalid and the ADDR value of Pr. 345 is the node address.

The operating states are indicated by the two colors (red and green) of the LED. For details, refer to page 79, where the system states and corresponding LED states are explained in detail.

75

Device Net

TM


1) Remove the front cover of the inverter and insert this option unit into slot 3 of the inverter.

2) Securely insert the option unit connector into the inverter connector. At this time, also fit the option fixing hole snugly.

3) Then, securely fix the option unit to the inverter with the mounting screws (2 places). If the mounting holes of the option unit do not match the inverter mounting holes, recheck whether the connector is secured properly.

4) Remove the DATA PORT from the inverter front cover and reinstall the front cover.

(To remove the DATA PORT cover, push it from the back of the front cover.)

Mounting screw

FR-A5ND plug-in option

Option connector

FR-A500 (FR-F500) series inverter

Slot 3

FR-A5ND

DeviceNet connector

Slot 2

Slot 1

Mounting screw holes


PU connector

Alarm lamp

Power lamp

76

3.4 Configuration and Wiring Procedure

3.4 Configuration and Wiring Procedure


Trunk cable

Device Net

TM


(121 )

Drop cable

PC/AT compatible

Connection with DeviceNet network

(2) Fabrication of DeviceNet drop cable

Use a DeviceNet drop cable to connect the inverter to the DeviceNet network. The drop cable consists of an ODVA approved "thin" cable and an ODVA approved 5-pin connector plugged to the connector of the inverter. To match the drop cable with the DeviceNet connector of the network trunk cable, use the one specified by the user/installer. The recommended parts are as follows:

DeviceNet "thin" drop cable: Belden make part number 3084A or equivalent

5-pin connector: Phoenix Contact make part number MSTB 2.5/5-ST-5.08-AU

Note: The maximum length of the drop cable should be 6.1m (20 feet).

DeviceNet option connector

Network trunk cable

DeviceNet cable

DeviceNet "thin" drop cable

DeviceNet cable

77

Device Net

TM

The DeviceNet connector pin-out connections are shown below. The function of each pin is listed below.

DeviceNet "thin" drop cable

DeviceNet option connector

Pin number

3

4

1

2

5

V- C- SH C+ V+

Connector pin-out connection diagram

Pin-Outs/Functions

Signal

V-

CAN-

Shield wire

CAN+

V+

Color

Black

Blue

Silver

White

Red

1) Strip the insulation sheath about 40mm (1.5 inches) from the end of the drop cable to expose the four color signal wires and silver shield wire.

2) Strip the insulations of the signal wires to approximately 6mm (1/4 inches). Plate each lead wire with solder.

3) Tin the end of the shield wire to prevent it from fraying.

4) Plug the connector to the DeviceNet cable as described below:

(a) Insert a flat-blade screwdriver (maximum width 3.75mm) into the top hole of the connector plug to open the clamp in the lower hole to insert the wire.

(b) Connect the signal wires to the plug of Phoenix Contact make. Confirm that the wire colors match the pins as indicated above.

(c) After all signal wires are inserted properly, turn the tightening screws clockwise to fasten the signal wires securely. When tightened properly, the signal wires cannot be pulled off.

(3) Wiring procedure

1) Power off the inverter and make sure that the working environment is safe. After ensuring safety, remove the inverter cover.

2) Set the node address of the inverter within the station range 0 to 63.

Set the tens digit of the node address to SW1 and the units digit to SW2. Any setting other than 0 to 63 is regarded as 63.

The node address setting switches are valid when ADDR of Pr. 345 is 63.

When ADDR of Pr. 345 is not 63, the node address setting switches are invalid and the ADDR value of Pr. 345 is the node address.

3) When the inverters have been installed properly and the node addresses set correctly, reinstall the inverter covers.

Make sure that the DeviceNet trunk cable is wired properly and the termination resistor is fitted to each termination of the trunk cable. These termination resistors should satisfy the following requirements:

1. R=121

2. 1% metal coating

3. 0.25W

Connect the drop cables to the network. (These are cables from the inverters to the DeviceNet network.)

If the trunk connector is a DeviceNet plug or shield connector which meets the standard, connection to the network can be made independently of whether the inverter is on or off. Completion of connection is recognized automatically by the inverter.

When free wires are used to make connection with the network, two or more signal wires may be shorted. As safety measures, also power off the network.

4) Make sure that connection is all completed and the cables irrelevant to DeviceNet are all connected to the inverter units as specified.

78

Device Net

TM

(4) Changing the node address

The node address status is checked only when the inverter is powered on. Therefore, changing the node address after power-on is invalid. The node address read at power-on is retained.

Change the node address setting switch positions in the following procedure (when ADDR of Pr. 345 is 63):

1) Power off the inverter.

2) Disconnect the drop cable from the option unit.

3) Remove the inverter cover.

4) Change the node address (node address setting switch positions).

5) Reinstall the inverter cover.

6) Reconnect the drop cable to the inverter unit.

7) Power on the inverter.

(5) LED status indications

The LED status indications represent the inverter's operating states listed below. Indications include five states: off, green lamp flickering, green, red lamp flickering and red.

Check the LED status after connecting the drop cable to the truck cable on the active network. The status LED of the option unit provides an indication according to the module/network status specified in the DeviceNet communication standard.

LED status indications

Off

LED Indication

Green lamp flickering

Green

System Status

Inverter power off, network power on

Network and inverter power on, host connection completed

Red lamp flickering Connection time-out

Red

Host unconnected status

Critical link error

Remarks

Powering on the inverter causes the inverter to check for identical node addresses on the network.

The inverter has been powered on and a check that there are no identical node addresses is completed. However, the host has not yet established a communication link.

The inverter has been powered on and the master station on the network recognizes this inverter unit. The LED holds this indication during communication.

The master station recognizes this inverter unit during communication (the

LED is green). However, no response is made within the time limit (Note) preset to the expected packet rate. Check to see if the host station is disconnected from the network.

Communication device fault

! Overlapping node address setting

! Network power off

! Network cable connection fault or no-connection

! Network failure

Power reset must be made to recover from the link error.

Note: Time limit = 4 × EPR (Expected Packet Rate)

Note that this EPR is set in the DeviceNet master. This does not apply to the EPR bit setting using Pr. 347.

79


Device Net

TM


This section is intended to facilitate inverter setting. This section assumes that the factory settings are used. If you want to change these values, change the settings in accordance with the data in 3.9 Object Map.

This section also assumes that the network cabling is complete and DevicveNet communication has been established.

Make sure that the LED status of the inverter is the flickering green lamp as described in Section 3.4(5).

(1) Overview

The inverter is regarded as a slave device in the DeviceNet communication standard. This means that the inverter cannot initiate messages on the network. The master device must establish communication with the inverter unit and send commands, requests for information, etc.

The inverter supports Group 3 Messaging as defined in the DeviceNet standard. This feature of the inverter means that it is possible for one master to control the inverter while the other master reads data from the same inverter.

(This also means that the DeviceNet master must support the UCMM protocol for proper operation.)

It is strongly recommended to configure the DeviceNet network using the software tool designed specifically for that purpose. The use of such a tool greatly simplifies the configuration, reduces confusion, and enhances reliability.

One of such tools is DeviceNet Manager

TM

supplied by Rockwell Automation. Tools are available from many other suppliers but the description contained in this section is based on use of DeviceNet Manager

TM

.

To use the DeviceNet Manager

TM

software, you need to acquire the DeviceNet Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) file. The

EDS file is a standard DeviceNet file which defines the configurable parameters of a field device. Refer to the configuration software tool manual for more information on the installation and use of the EDS file.

(2) Baud rate setting

The baud rate must be consistent throughout the network in order to establish communication and enable equipment communication via the network.

Therefore, this step is important for the inverter setting.

! At power-on, the inverter defaults to the communication speed of 125kbps.

! You can set the baud rate using "Node Address", Attribute 1 of DeviceNet Class 0x03, Instance 1. Refer to Section

3.9.2 (1) for further information.

! You can also set the node address manually by changing the Pr. 346 value from the parameter unit. Refer to page

81 for more information.

(3) Node address setting

The node address assigned to the inverter is determined when the inverter is powered on. When an address conflict is found in network configuration, you can set the baud rate using "Baud Rate", Attribute 2 of DeviceNet Class 0x03, instance. Refer to Section 3.9.2 (1) for details.

You can also set the baud rate manually by changing the Pr. 345 value from the parameter unit. Refer to page 81 for more information.

80

Device Net

TM

(4) DeviceNet I/O assembly

Communication between the master device and a slave device on the network requires that the DeviceNet Class

0x04- "Assembly Object" in both devices be the same.

1) Default I/O assembly

When power is switched on, the inverter defaults to Class 0x04- Output Instance 21 and Class 0x04- Input

Instance 71. Refer to Section 3.8 (2) for more information on DeviceNet Class 0x04 and I/O Instance.

2) Polling rate

Determination of the proper polling rate of the DeviceNet master device depends on the characteristics of the entire network. To minimize potential conflicts and maximize system reliability, a polling rate interval of 30ms or longer is suggested. The user may adjust this rate within the network performance range.

3) Loss of communications

In the default polled communication mode, the inverter responds to loss of communication in accordance with the

WDA bit setting of Pr. 345 defined on page 81. These bits default to 0. Such loss of communication may occur due to disconnection of network cabling, network power off, failure within the master etc.

When the WDA bits of Pr. 345 are set to 0, the inverter keeps executing the last command received until the communication time limit is exceeded. This time limit is four times the Expected Packet Rate (EPR) configured by the user (note that this EPR is set by the DeviceNet master. This differs from the EPR bit setting of Pr. 345).

When the time limit of the inverter is exceeded and the WDA is activated, the E.OP3 error occurs in the inverter, coasting it to a stop.

When the WDA bits of Pr. 345 are set to 2, the inverter does not generate an error and keeps executing the last command received until the next instruction is given. The inverter automatically resets the connection when communication is restored.

(5) Parameters

Parameter

Number

338 (Note 1)

339 (Note 1)

340 (Note 1)

345 (Note 2)

346 (Note 2)

Function

Operation command write

Speed command write


DeviceNet address start data

DeviceNet baud rate start data

Setting Range

0, 1

0, 1

0, 1, 2

0 to 65535

0 to 65535

Minimum Setting

Increments

1

1

1

1

1

Factory Setting

0

0

0

41023(0xA03F)

20612(0x5084)

Note 1.

Refer to Section 3.6 Operation Modes (page 84) for details of Pr. 338 to 340.

Note 2.

You cannot write the Pr. 345 and Pr. 346 values (Class 0x67 Instance 1 Attribute 45 and 46) from the network. They may only be read. In addition, these parameters may be set from the FR-PU04 only. Note that you cannot set them from the FR-DU04.

Pr. 345 is a bit map parameter and is defined as follows:

15 14 13 12

Address key

11 10

WDA

9 8 7 6

DN failure mode (Note)

5 4 3 2

Device node address

1 0

Pr. 346 is a bit map parameter and is defined as follows:

15 14 13 12

Baud rate key

11 10 9 8

Input assembly

7 6 5 4 3

Output assembly

2 1 0

Baud rate

Note: The DN failure mode is not supported. The inverter always recognizes it as 0.

81

Device Net

TM

<Definition of each registration>

Item Description Definition

Factory

Setting

Watch dog time-out operation (WDA)

Input assembly

(INP) (Note 1)

Output assembly

(OUTP) (Note 1)

Baud rate (BR)

Device node address

(ADDR) (Note 2)

Specifies the inverter operation when communication stops for a given period

(4 × EPR).

Note: You may also set this function using

DeviceNet Connection Object Class

0x05, Instance 2, Attribute 12.

However, since it is not written to

EEPROM in the inverter, resetting the inverter returns to the previous value set from the parameter unit.

When the value is changed from the parameter unit, the EEPROM value is also changed.

(1) Setting of 0, 4 (shift to time-out status)

Inverter: E.OP3 occurs.

LED indication: Red flickering

Network: Connection continued.

(2) Setting of 1, 5 (auto delete)

Inverter: E.OP3 occurs.

LED indication: Green lit

Network: Polled I/O connection cut off.

(3) Setting of 2, 6 (auto reset: time-out operation ignored)

Inverter: No error



(4) Setting of 3, 7 (WDA invalid)

Inverter: No error



Choose the input instance of Assembly

Object Class 0x04 used.

(You can set this function using Control

Management Class 0x29, Instance 1,

Attribute 40.)

0 = Input Instance 70



Choose the output instance of Assembly

Object Class 0x04 used.

(You can set this function using Control

Management Class 0x29, Instance 1,

Attribute 41.)

0 = Output Instance 20



Set the baud rate.

(You can set this function using

DeviceNet Object Class 0x03, Instance 1,

Attribute 2.)

Set the node address (MAC ID) of the device.

(You can set this function using

DeviceNet Object Class 0x03, Instance 1,

Attribute 1.)

0, 3 = 125 kbps

1 = 250 kbps

2 = 500 kbps

0 to 63

0

1

1

0

63

Address key

(ADDRKEY) (Note 3)

Baud rate key

(BRKEY) (Note 3)

Internal setting

Internal setting

Fixed to 10 (1010 in binary)

Fixed to 5 (0101 in binary)

10

5

Note 1.

The input assembly and output assembly must match. (For example, if the input assembly is 0, the output assembly must also be 0.) Any other value than 0, 1 and 6 set to the input and output assemblies is regarded as 6.

Note 2.

The node address may also be set with the node address setting switches, which are made valid only when ADDR of Pr. 345 is 63. (When ADDR of Pr. 345 is not 63, the node address setting switch value is ignored and the ADDR value of Pr. 345 is valid.)

Note 3.

If the setting is other than the fixed value, the FR-A5ND recognizes it as a wrong value, and if the other parameter (WDA, INP, OUTP, BR, ADDR) values are different from the factory settings, it uses the factory settings as the values of these parameters.

82

Device Net

TM

<Parameter setting method>

The Pr. 345 value is the sum of the values in all items which have been multiplied by the corresponding factors in the following table.

Pr. 345 setting method

Item

Address key

WDA

DN failure mode

Device node address

Total (Pr. 345)

Setting

Range

10

0 to 3

0

0 to 63

Factor

4096

512

64

1

Example 1

(Setting × Factor)

10 × 4096

0 × 512

0 × 64

63 × 1

41023

Example 2


10 × 4096

1 × 512

0 × 64

4 × 1

41476

Example 3


10 × 4096

2 × 512

0 × 64

10 ×1

41994

If you do not have the DevceNet configuration tool, enter the total value to the inverter using the FR-PU04. The values in Example 1 in the above table are the same as the factory settings.

! Example 1

Address key = 10 only

Watch dog time-out operation WDA = 0

DN failure mode = 0 only

Device node address = 63

Total = (10 × 4096) + (0 × 512) + (0 × 64) + (63 × 1) = 41023

The Pr. 346 value is the sum of the values in all items which have been multiplied by the corresponding factors in the following table.

Pr. 346 setting method

Item

Baud rate key

Input assembly

Output assembly

Baud rate

Total (Pr. 346)

Setting

Range

5

0 to 6

0 to 6

0 to 2

Factor

4096

128

4

1

Example 1


5 × 4096

1 × 128

1 × 4

0 × 1

20612

Example 2


5 × 4096

0 × 128

0 × 4

1 × 1

20481

Example 3


5 × 4096

6 × 128

6 × 4

2 × 1

21274

If you do not have the DevceNet configuration tool, enter the total value to the inverter using the FR-PU04. The values in Example 1 in the above table are the same as the factory settings.

! Example 1

Baud rate key = 5 only

Input assembly = 1 (Input Instance 71)

Output assembly = 1 (Output Instance 21)

Baud rate = 0 (125kbps)

Total = (5 × 4096) + (1 × 128) + (1 × 4) + (0 × 1) = 20612

83


Device Net

TM

3.6 Operation Modes


1)

2)

3)

PU operation : Controls the inverter from the keyboard of the operation panel (FR-DU04) or parameter unit (FR-PU04) installed to the inverter.

External operation : Controls the inverter by switching on/off external signals connected to the control circuit terminals of the inverter.

DeviceNet operation : Controls the inverter in accordance with the personal computer, PLC or other program via the DeviceNet unit (FR-A5ND).





! Both the STF and STR signals are off; and



Pr. 79 Setting

0

1

2

3, 4

5

6

7

8

Operation Mode Selection


PU operation mode




Switch-over



Switching to DeviceNet Operation Mode


Disallowed

Allowed

Disallowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Allowed only in the external operation mode when the PU interlock signal

(X12) is on.



Communication not yet established

Communication established

PU operation PU operation

A B

(Switching disallowed)

C

D

G

H

External operation

Communication established

Communication released

External operation

E

F

DeviceNet

Symbol

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

Switching Type





External operation DeviceNet operation

DeviceNet operation external operation

PU operation DeviceNet operation

DeviceNet operation PU operation




Switching disallowed.

Switching disallowed.

By user program.

By user program.

Switching allowed by user program only when Pr. 79 = 6.

Switching allowed by user program only when Pr. 79 = 6.

When "1 or 2" is set in Pr. 340 "link start mode selection", the DeviceNet operation mode is selected at power-on or inverter reset.

Note 1.


84

Device Net

TM

3) Link start mode

By setting the Pr. 340 value as appropriate, you can select the operation mode at power on or at restoration from instantaneous power failure.

Pr. 340

Setting Pr.79

Operation Mode


Power Failure

0

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7


PU operation

External operation



Programmed operation mode

Switch-over mode







Inverter is operated by the program.


Shift to the PU operation mode is controlled by ON/OFF of the

X12 signal.

8



1

2

DeviceNet operation

DeviceNet automatic restart after instantaneous power failure

Inverter goes into the DeviceNet operation mode.


Inverter goes into the DeviceNet operation mode.

When Pr. 57 setting is other than 9999 (automatic restart after instantaneous power failure), automatic restart is made in the status prior to occurrence of an instantaneous power failure to continue DeviceNet operation, if a communication signal is not given.




! When starting DeviceNet operation at power-on, set "1 or 2" in Pr. 340.

85

Device Net

TM


In the DeviceNet operation mode, commands from the external terminals and program are as listed below:


Fixed functions


0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

22

Pr. 338 "operation command write"

Pr. 339 "speed command write"




Output halt (MRS)

Reset (RES)

4

1

DeviceNet operation frequency

2






Jog operation selection (JOG)




Third function (X9)



PU external interlock (X12)

External DC dynamic braking start (X13)

PID control valid terminal (X14)

Brake opening completion signal (BRI)


Load pattern selection-forward/reverse rotation boost switching (X17)


Load torque high-speed frequency (X19)

Orientation command

0: DN

0: DN

DN

DN

DN

External

Both

DN

Compensation

DN

DN

DN

DN

External

External

DN

DN

External

External

External

DN

DN

DN

External

DN

DN

DN

DN

Remote setting (RH, RM, RH) DN

0: DN

1: External

DN

DN

DN

External

Both

External

External

External

External

External

External

DN

External

External

External

External

DN

External

External

External

DN

External

DN

External

DN

DN

DN

DN

External

1: External

0: DN

External

External

External

External

Both

DN

Compensation

DN

DN

DN

External

External

External

External

DN

External

External

External

External

External

DN

External

External

External

External

External

External

DN

1: External

1: External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

External


Programmed operation group selection

(RH, RM, RL)



DN

DN

External

DN

DN

External

External

External

Remarks

(Note 1)

Pr. 59 = 0

Pr. 59 = 0

Pr. 59 = 0

Pr. 59 = 0

(Note 2)

Pr. 59 =

1, 2

Pr. 79 = 5

DeviceNet operation disallowed

Pr. 270 =

1, 3


External :Control by signal from external terminal is only valid.

DN

Both

:Control from DeviceNet sequence program is only valid.

:Control from both external terminal and PLC is valid.

:Control from both external terminal and PLC is invalid.

Compensation :Control by signal from external terminal is only valid if Pr. 28 (multi-speed input compensation) setting is 1.

Note 1.


(Pr. 30 = 2) or if the PU operation interlock signal (X12) is not assigned when the PU operation interlock function is set (Pr. 79 = 7), this function is also used by the MRS signal and therefore the MRS signal is only valid for the external terminals, independently of the Pr. 338 and Pr. 339 settings.

Note 2.


86


Device Net

TM



Control Method Item

Net mode

Operation Mode

External mode PU mode

DeviceNet


Operation command

Output frequency setting

Monitoring

Parameter write

Parameter read

Inverter reset

Operation command


Inverter reset

Allowed (Note 1)

Allowed (Note 1)

Allowed

Allowed (Note 3)

Allowed

Allowed (Note 2)

Allowed (Note 1)

Allowed (Note 1)

Allowed

Disallowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Disallowed (Note 3)

Allowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Disallowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Disallowed (Note 3)

Allowed

Disallowed

Disallowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Note 1.


Note 2.

The inverter cannot be reset at occurrence of a network error.

Note 3.

As set in Pr. 77.

Note 4.

The inverter goes into the external operation mode if it is reset from DeviceNet in the net operation mode.

(2) Monitoring

The following items can be monitored by Class 0x2A Attribute 141 to 193:

1) Output frequency ......................... Binary in 0.01Hz increments

2) Output current ............................. Binary in 0.01A increments

3) Output voltage ............................. Binary in 0.1V increments

4) Frequency setting ........................ Binary in 0.01Hz increments

5) Running speed ............................ Binary in 1r/min increments

6) Motor torque ................................ Binary in 0.1% increments

7) Converter output voltage ............. Binary in 0.1V increments

8) Regenerative brake duty ............. Binary in 0.1% increments

9) Electronic overcurrent protection load factor ................... Binary in 0.1% increments

10) Output current peak value ........... Binary in 0.01A increments

11) Input power.................................. Binary in 0.01kW increments

12) Output power ............................... Binary in 0.01kW increments

13) Input terminal states

15-12

0

11

CS

10 9 8

RES STOP MRS

7

JOG

6

RH

5

RM

4

RL

14) Output terminal states

15-6

0

15) Load meter .................................. Binary in 0.1% increments

16) Motor exciting current .................. Binary in 0.01A increments

17) Position pulse (*) ......................... Binary in 1 pulse increments

18) Cumulative energization time ...... Binary in 1 hr increments

19) Orientation status (*)

20) Actual operation time................... Binary in 1 hr increments

21) Motor load factor ......................... Binary in 0.1% increments

22) Cumulative power........................ Binary in 1kwh increments

23) Alarm definition

*Valid only when FR-A5AP is fitted

5

ABC

4

FU

3

RT

3

OL

2

AU

2

IPF

1

STR

0

STF

1

SU

0

RUN

87

Device Net

TM

24) Inverter status

You can monitor the inverter status using Class 0x2A, Attribute 114, A500 Inverter Status. This is defined in the following bit map: bit

2

3

0

1

4

5

6

7

Definition

Running (RUN)

Forward run (forward rotation)

Reverse run (reverse rotation)


Overload alarm (OL)

Instantaneous power failure (IPF)


Alarm output (ABC)


To send the control input instruction, check Attribute 114 of Class 0x2A AC Drive Object supplied with the instruction data you want. For example, setting of numerical value 0x0002 means that the inverter is run in forward rotation at the frequency setting in RAM.

Follow the bit map table below:

15-11

0

10

MRS

9

CS(*)

8

AU(*)

7 6 5

RT(*) JOG(*) RL(*)

4

RM(*)

3

RH(*)

2

STR

1

STF

The input signals marked * can be changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection).

0

0


The running frequency can be set to a minimum of 0.01Hz within the range 0 to 400Hz.

The frequency setting in RAM can be made using Attribute 112 and 113 of Class 0x2A AC Drive Object.


Functions can be written using DeviceNet. Note that write during inverter operation will result in a write mode error.


Functions can be read using DeviceNet.


Alarm Location

Inverter alarm

DeviceNet alarm

Description

Inverter operation

Data communication

Inverter operation

Data communication

DeviceNet mode

Stop

Continued

Stop (Note 1)

Continued (Note 2)

Operation Mode

External mode

Stop

Continued

Continued

Continued (Note 2)

PU mode

Stop

Continued

Continued

Continued (Note 2)

Note 1.

The motor coasts to a stop if the inverter outputs an error due to the FR-A5ND's connection object failure or watch dog time-out.

Note 2.

Depends on the communication error type.

88

3.8 DeviceNet Programming

Device Net

TM

3.8 DeviceNet Programming

DeviceNet programs change with the master module. For programming details, refer to the master module instruction manual.

(1) Object model

In DeviceNet, each node (device to communicate with) is modeled as a cluster of objects (abstracted specific product functions). In other words, each node allows the map of an object model to be drawn on the basis of the characteristics of each function. This is an object map.

The following four items are used to represent an object:

Class

Instance

Attribute

Service

Item Description

Cluster of all objects having the same type of function

Generalized object

Specific representation of object

Representation of object characteristic

Function supported by object or class

Instance 1

Attribute No. 1

Attribute No. 2

Service code 0×05

Instance 2

Instance 1

Instance 0

Class 0x01

Class

Human

Class 0x05

Object model image diagram

Object model example

Instance

John

Mary

Attribute

Sex

Age

Sex

Age

Node

Attribute Value

Male

20

Female

42

In DeviceNet communication, changing this attribute value enables the inverter setting to be changed and reading the attribute value enables the inverter data (output current value, etc.) to be monitored.

Such reading and changing of the attribute value, sending of operation commands to the inverter, and others can be performed using the I/O instances. The I/O data examples given below use the I/O instances to run the inverter and change the parameter values.

Refer to Section 3.9 Object Map for information on each class, instance, attribute and service.

89

Device Net

TM

(2) I/O specifications (Polled I/O connection)


The output signals from the master module can be provided using any of the following output instances:

! Class 0x04 - Output instance 20

Byte Bit 7

0

Output instance

20 (0x14) 1

2

3

Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3

Speed setting (lower byte)

Speed setting (upper byte)

Bit 2

Fault

Reset

Bit 1 Bit 0

Forward

Rotation


Byte Bit 7

Output instance

21 (0x15)

0

1

2

3

Bit 6

NetRef

Bit 5

NetCtrl

Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2

Fault

Reset

Bit 1

Reverse

Rotation

Bit 0

Forward

Rotation




Output instance

26 (0x1A)

Byte

0

3

4

1

2

5

Bit 7

Write

Param

Bit 6

NetRef

Bit 5

NetCtrl

Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2

Fault

Reset

00

Speed setting or parameter write data (lower byte)

Speed setting or parameter write data (upper byte)

Parameter class

Parameter attribute number

Bit 1

Reverse

Rotation

Bit 0

Forward

Rotation

Output instance 26 (0x1A) is used to set write/read the parameter access control, parameter class, parameter attribute number and parameter write data.

Output instance 26 must be used with input instance 76 in the command which requires parameter access.

Output instance 26 uses 6-byte data.

<Definition of BYTE data>

Output instances 20, 21, 26 are executed under the following rules. (Some bits and data are not in output instances 20, 21. Refer to the above data table.)

BYTE 0: Bit 7 - If Write Param = 1, the parameter write data in BYTE 2 and BYTE 3 is written to the parameter indicated in BYTE 4 and BYTE 5 and the functions of the other bits are ignored.

If Write Param = 0, the RPM speed setting (same value as in BYTE 2 and BYTE 3 of output instance 21) is set and the functions of the other bits are executed.

Bit 6 - If NetRef = 1, the speed setting is adopted from BYTE 2 and BYTE 3. (Note 2)

Bit 5 - If NetCtrl = 1, Bits 2, 1, 0 are made valid.

If NetCtrl = 0, the operation command entered from the external terminal (STF, STR terminal) is made valid. (Note 3)

Bit 4 - Unused

Bit 3 - Unused

Bit 2 - If Fault Reset is changed from 0 to 1, the inverter is reset.

Bit 1 - If Reverse Rotation = 1 and Forward Rotation = 0, reverse rotation is performed.

Bit 0 - If Forward Rotation = 1 and Reverse Rotation = 0, forward rotation is performed.

Note 1.

To make Bits 2, 1, 0 valid, NetCtrl must be 1.

Note 2.

The speed command write (Pr. 339) changes.

Note 3.

The operation command write (Pr. 338) changes.

BYTE 1: Must be 00.

BYTE 2: Lower byte of speed setting (1r/min increments) or parameter write data

BYTE 3: Upper byte of speed setting (1r/min increments) or parameter write data

BYTE 4: Parameter class, e.g. 0x2A, 0x66, 0x67

BYTE 5: Parameter attribute No. (instance 1), e.g. 0x0A, 0x65

90

Device Net

TM


The input signals to the master module can be provided using any of the following input instances:

! Class 0x04 - Input instance 70

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 1

Input instance

70 (0x46)

0

Bit 2

Forward

Rotation

1

2

3

Actual speed (lower byte)

Actual speed (upper byte)

Bit 0

Faulted

! Class 0x04 - Input instance 71 (factory setting)

Input instance

71 (0x47)

Byte

0

Bit 7

At Ref

Speed

Bit 6

Ref

From

Net

1

2

3

Bit 5

Ctrl

From

Net

Bit 4

Ready

Bit 3

Reverse

Rotation



Bit 2

Forward

Rotation

Bit 1 Bit 0

Faulted

! Class 0x04 - Input instance 76

Byte

0

Bit 7

At Ref

Speed

Bit 6

Ref

From

Net

Bit 5

Ctrl

From

Net

Bit 4

Ready

Bit 3

Reverse

Rotation

Bit 2

Forward

Rotation

Bit 1 Bit 0

Faulted

Input instance

76 (0x4C)

3

4

1

2

5

00



Parameter read (lower byte)

Parameter read (upper byte)

Input instance 76 (0x4C) offers 16-bit parameter data.

Input instance 76 must be used with output instance 26 in the command which requires parameter access. Input instance 76 uses 6-byte data.

<Definition of BYTE data>

Input instances 70, 71, 76 are executed under the following rules. (Some bits and data are not in input instances

70, 71. Refer to the above data table.)

BYTE 0: Bit 7 - When At Ref Speed = 1, operation is being performed at the speed setting.

Bit 6 - When Ref From Net = 1, the speed setting from the DeviceNet master is used.

Bit 5 - When Ctrl From Net = 1, error reset, forward rotation or reverse rotation is given from the

DeviceNet master.

Bit 4 - Ready

Bit 3 - Reverse rotation

Bit 2 - Forward rotation

Bit 1 - Unused

Bit 0 - When Faulted = 1, the inverter is in error.

BYTE 1: Must be 00.

BYTE 2: Lower byte of actual speed (1r/min increments) (Note 1)

BYTE 3: Upper byte of actual speed (1r/min increments) (Note 1)

BYTE 4: Parameter read data (lower byte) set in output instance 26 (Bytes 4, 5) (Note 2)

BYTE 5: Parameter read data (upper byte) set in output instance 26 (Bytes 4, 5) (Note 2)

Note 1.

Not the actual speed of the motor.

Note 2.

When a value is written to a certain parameter and the same parameter value is then read right after that, it may remain unchanged since it will be read before the data is reflected on Bytes 4 and 5 because of processing time. Read the same parameter value more than 1 second after writing it.

91

Device Net

TM

(3) Programming examples (Data examples for Polled I/O connection)

Programming changes with the device used as the master station. Refer to the master station programming manual.

Data examples for programming are given below.

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

Item

Operation mode setting

Inverter speed reading

Running speed setting

Operation command designation

Inverter status reading

Parameter reading

Parameter writing

Data Example

Set to the DeviceNet operation mode.

Read the inverter data.

Set the running speed to 900r/min.

Command the forward rotation and mid-speed signals.

Read the inverter status.

Read Pr. 0 "torque boost".

Set "2.0%" in Pr. 0 "torque boost".

Refer To Page

92

92

93

93

94

95

96

1) Operation mode setting data example

When sending the DeviceNet operation mode command to the inverter, use Class 0x2A, Attribute No. 120 to write the following data to output instance 26:

<Write data example: DeviceNet operation mode>

Output Instance 26 b7

1 b6

0

Description b5

0 b4

0 b3

0 b2

0 b1

0 b0

0

BYTE 0 0x80

Parameter write Setting is invalid.

(Ignored)

BYTE 1

BYTE 2

0x00

0x14

BYTE 3 0x00

(Lower-byte data)

(Upper-byte data)

Data 0x0014 (DeviceNet operation mode) of parameter class 0x2A, parameter attribute No. 120 (0x78)

BYTE 4

BYTE 5

0x2A

0x78

Parameter class

Parameter attribute No. (Instance 1)

2) Inverter speed reading data example

To know the inverter speed, read the value of input instance 71.

<Read data example: 60Hz forward running>

Input Instance 71 b7

1 b6

1

Description b5

1 b4

1 b3

0 b2

1 b1

0 b0

0

BYTE 0

BYTE 1

BYTE 2

BYTE 3

0xF4

0x00

0x08

0x07

(Lower-byte data)

(Upper-byte data)

During operation at speed setting

Speed being set by DeviceNet

During ready

During forward rotation

Inverter normal

Error reset or controlled by DeviceNet

Actual speed 0x0708 1800(r/min)

92

Device Net

TM

3) Running speed setting data example

When running the inverter at 900r/min (30Hz) in forward rotation, write the following data to output instance 21:

<Write data example: 30Hz forward rotation operation>


0 b6

1 b5

1

Description b4 b3 b2 b1

0 0 0 0 b0

1

BYTE 0 0x61

Speed set by DeviceNet


Forward rotation

BYTE 1

BYTE 2

BYTE 3

0x00

0x84

0x03

(Lower-byte data)

(Upper-byte data)

Speed setting 0x0384 900(r/min)

4) Operation command setting data example

When sending the forward rotation and mid-speed commands to the inverter, use Class 0x2A, Attribute No. 114 to write the following data to output instance 26:

<Write data example: Forward rotation, mid-speed operation>


1 b6

0

Description b5

0 b4

0 b3

0 b2

0 b1

0 b0

0

BYTE 0 0x80


(Ignored)

BYTE 1 0x00

BYTE 2 0x12 (Lower-byte data) b15

Data of Class 0x2A, Attribute No. 114 (0x72) b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 b5

0 b4

1 b3

0 b2

0 b1

1 b0

0

BYTE 3 0x00

(Upper-byte data)

RM STF

BYTE 4

BYTE 5

0x2A

0x72

Parameter class


93

Device Net

TM

5) Inverter status reading data example

When reading the inverter status, use Class 0x2A, Attribute No. 114 to read data.

<Write data example: Perform write to request the Class 0x2A, Attribute No. 114 data>


0 b6

1 b5

1

Description b4

0 b3

0 b2

0 b1

0 b0

1

BYTE 0

BYTE 1

BYTE 2

BYTE 3

BYTE 4

BYTE 5

0x61



Forward rotation

0x00

0x84

0x03

0x2A

0x72

(Lower-byte data)

(Upper-byte data)


Parameter class


<Read data example: Read the Class 0x2A, Attribute No. 114 data>


1 b6

1

Description b5

1 b4

1 b3

0 b2

1 b1

0 b0

0

BYTE 0

BYTE 1

BYTE 2

BYTE 3

BYTE 4

BYTE 5

0xF4

0x00

0x84

0x03

(Lower-byte data)

(Upper-byte data)

0x4B

(Lower-byte data)



During ready



Inverter normal


0x00

(Upper-byte data) b15

Data of parameter class 0x2A, parameter attribute No. 114 (0x72) b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 b0

1

FU SU During forward rotation

RUN

94

Device Net

TM

6) Parameter reading data example

When reading the setting of inverter's Pr. 0 "torque boost", use Class 0x66, Attribute No. 10 to read data.

<Write data example: Perform write to request the Class 0x66, Attribute No. 10 data>


0 b6

1 b5

1

Description b4

0 b3

0 b2

0 b1

0 b0

1

BYTE 0

BYTE 1

BYTE 2

BYTE 3

BYTE 4

BYTE 5

0x61



Forward rotation

0x00

0x84

0x03

0x66

0x0A

(Lower-byte data)

(Upper-byte data)


Parameter class


<Read data example: Read the Class 0x66, Attribute No. 10 data>


1 b6

1

Description b5

1 b4

1 b3

0 b2

1 b1

0 b0

0

BYTE 0 0xF4

BYTE 1

BYTE 2

BYTE 3

BYTE 4

BYTE 5

0x00

0x84

0x03

0x1E

0x00

(Lower-byte data)

(Upper-byte data)

(Lower-byte data)

(Upper-byte data)



During ready



Inverter normal


Data of parameter class 0x66, parameter attribute No. 10 (0x0A)

0X001E 30 (Represents 3.0% because of 0.1% increments)

95

Device Net

TM

7) Parameter writing data example

When setting 2.0% in Pr. 0 "torque boost" of the inverter, use Class 0x66, Attribute No. 10 to write the following data to output instance 26:

<Write data example: Pr. 0 = 2.0%>


1 b6

0

Description b5 b4 b3

0 0 0 b2

0 b1

0 b0

0

BYTE 0 0x80


(Ignored)

BYTE 1

BYTE 2

0x00

0x14

(Lower-byte data)

(Upper-byte data)

Data of parameter class 0x66, parameter attribute No. 10 (0x0A)

0X0014 20 (Represents 2.0% because of 0.1% increments)

BYTE 3

BYTE 4

BYTE 5

0x00

0x66

0x0A

Parameter class



1) When designing software, use either of the following techniques:

! Use of handshake technique

After sending a request to the FR-A5ND option unit, wait for a reply from the option unit, and after receiving the reply, send the next request.

! Considering the response time (refer to page 74) of the FR-A5ND, set the waiting time for the next request.

For example, send the next request more than 30ms after sending a write request.

2) When the master station connected is of OMRON (Model C200HW-DRM21-V1, Model CVM1-DRM21-V1), use it after making either of the following master station settings:

! Use it in the scan list disable mode.

! When using it in the scan list enable mode, increase the master station's communication intervals more than

200ms.

(Use OMRON's configurator to set the master station's communication intervals.)

96

3.9 Object Map

Device Net

TM

3.9 Object Map

This section describes the object definitions for use of FR-A5ND DeviceNet. For details of the definitions, refer to ODVA's

DeviceNet documentation.

Class

0x01

0x03

0x04

0x05

0x28

0x29

0x2A

0x66

0x67

Object Name

Identity object

DeviceNet object

Assembly object

DeviceNet connection object

Motor data object

Control management object

AC drive object

A500 expansion object I

A500 expansion object II

In the following tables, Get means read from the inverter and Set means write to the inverter.

3.9.1 Class 0x01 Identity object

(1) Class 0x01 Instance 0 attributes

Attribute No.

6

7

1

2

Access

Get

Get

Get

Get

Description

Version of Class 0x01 object

Maximum instance count of Class 0x01

Maximum attribute count of Class 0x01

Maximum instance attribute count of Class 0x01

Type

Word

Word

Word

Word

Value

7

7

1

1

(2) Class 0x01 Instance 0 service

Service Code

0x0E

Service

Read the attribute value.

(3) Class 0x01 Instance 1 attributes

Attribute No.

3

4

1

2

5

6

Access

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Description

Vendor ID (Mitsubishi Electric)

Product type (AC drive)

Product code

Version

Status

Serial number

Type

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Word

Value

82

02

500

1.YYY (Note 1)

0000

XXXXXXXX

(Note 2)

A500 (Note 3) 7 Get Product name (FR-A500) Word

Note 1.

The upper byte of the read hexadecimal word data indicates the integer part and its lower byte indicates the fraction part. For example, the read data of 0x010A means version 1.010.

Note 2.

The value changes with the product.

Note 3.

The actual data stored are 0x04, 0x41, 0x35, 0x30 and 0x30. The first 0x04 indicates the 4-byte data and the others indicate "A500" in ASCII.

(4) Class 0x01 Instance 1 services

Service Code Service

0x05

0x0E

Reset or all parameter clear


Definition

0: Reset

1: All parameter clear

97

Device Net

TM

3.9.2 Class 0x03 DeviceNet object


Attribute No.

1

2

3

4

5

8

9

Access Description

Get/Set Node address setting (Note 1)

Get/Set

Baud rate setting (Note 1)

0: 125kbps

1: 250kbps

2: 500kbps

Get/Set

Get/Set

Bus off interrupt

0: On detection of bus off, the CAN chip is held in the reset status.

1: On detection of bus off, the CAN chip is reset and communication is continued.

Bus off counter

(Counts the number of times when the CAN chip is set to bus-off.)

Range

0 to 63

0, 1, 2

0, 1

0 to 255

Get

Get

Get

Allocation information

Actual value of node address

Actual value of baud rate

0 to

0xFFFF

0 to 63

0, 1, 2

Note 1.

May also be read using Class 0x67 Instance 1 Attributes 45 and 46.

Note 2.

For detailed definitions, refer to the DeviceNet specifications Vol. I 5-5.

Value

0

0

0

0

0x0103

0

0


Service Code

0x4B

0x4C

0x0E

0x10

Service

Allocate

Release


Write the attribute value.

3.9.3 Class 0x04 Assembly object

(1) Class 0x04 Output instance 20

Byte

Bit 7 Bit 6

0

Bit 5

1

2

3

Description

Bit 4 Bit 3



Bit 2

Fault

Reset


Byte

Bit 7 Bit 6

0

NetRef

1

2

3

Bit 5

NetCtrl

Description

Bit 4 Bit 3



Bit 2

Fault

Reset

Bit 1 Bit 0

Forward

Rotation

Bit 1

Reverse

Rotation

Bit 0

Forward

Rotation

98

Device Net

TM


Byte

0

Bit 7

Write

Param

Bit 6

NetRef

3

4

5

1

2

(5) Class 0x04 Input instance 71

Byte

Bit 7

0 At Ref

Speed

Bit 6

Ref

From

Net

1

2

3

Description

Bit 5

NetCtrl

Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2

Fault

Reset

00

Speed setting or parameter write data (lower byte)

Speed setting or parameter write data (upper byte)

Parameter class

Parameter attribute number

Description

Bit 4 Bit 3

Ready

Reverse

Rotation

Bit 2

Forward

Rotation

Bit 1

Reverse

Rotation

Bit 0

Forward

Rotation

Note 1.

Before directing the inverter via the network, always turn on the bits of "NetCtrl" and "NetRef". If they are off, the inverter will not accept the directives even in the network operation mode.

Note 2.

When issuing a command, always hold the forward/reverse rotation flag in the present running status.

Transmitting a wrong status will change the running status.

(Example: The inverter will stop the output if bit 0 is turned off during the inverter forward rotation command.)

Note 3.

Always set "0" in Byte 1 of output instance 26. The inverter will not recognize any other value as normal data.


Byte

Bit 7

0

Bit 6

1

2

3

Bit 5

Description

Bit 4 Bit 3



Bit 2

Forward

Rotation

Bit 1 Bit 0

Faulted

Bit 5

Ctrl

From

Net



Bit 1 Bit 0

Faulted


Byte

Bit 7

0 At Ref

Speed

Bit 6

Ref

From

Net

1

2

3

4

5

Bit 5

Ctrl

From

Net

Description

Bit 4 Bit 3

Ready

Reverse

Rotation

00



Parameter read (lower byte)

Parameter read (upper byte)

Bit 2

Forward

Rotation

Bit 1 Bit 0

Faulted

99

Device Net

TM

3.9.4 Class 0x05 DeviceNet connection object

The FR-A5ND supports only Polled I/O and Explicit Messaging. It does not support Bit-Strobed I/O. Also, Instances 4 to 6 are the instances of Explicit Messaging.

(1) Class 0x05 Instance 1 attributes (Explicit Messaging)

Attribute No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

12

13


Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Connection status

0: Non-existent

1: Configuring

2: Waiting for connection ID

3: Established

4: Timed Out

5: Deferred Delete

Connection instance type

0: Explicit Messaging connection

1: Polled I/O connection

Transport Trigger Class

0x83: Server Transport Class 3

Produced Connection ID

Consumed Connection ID

Get

Get

Initial Communication Characteristics

(Defines the sending and receiving message groups)

0x22: Group 2 message in both sending and receiving

Produced Connection Size

(Maximum number of bytes of the message body that may be sent)

Get

Consumed Connection Size

(Max. number of bytes of the message body that may be received)

Get/Set Expected Packet Rate(EPR)

Get

Get

Watch dog operation

0: Transition to timed out

1: Auto Delete

2: Auto reset

3: Deferred Delete

Produced Connection Path Length

14 Get Produced Connection Path

15

16

Get

Get

Consumed Connection Path Length

Consumed Connection Path

Note: For detailed definitions, refer to the DeviceNet specifications Vol. I 5-4.

Range

0 to 5

0,1

0 to 0xFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 3

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFF

0 to 0xFF

0

0 to 0xFF

Value

0

0x83

0x22

7

7

1

0

0x04

0x03

0

0

100

Device Net

TM

(2) Class 0x05 Instance 2 attributes (Polled I/O)

Attribute No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

12


Get

Get

Connection status

0: Non-existent

1: Configuring

2: Waiting for connection ID

3: Established

4: Timed Out

5: Deferred Delete


0: Explicit Messaging connection

1: Polled I/O connection

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get


0x82: Server Transport Class 2



Get


(Defines the sending and receiving message groups)

0x01: Sending Group 1 message,

Receiving Group 2 message

Get

Get

Produced Connection Size (Note 1)

(Maximum amount of I/O data that may be sent)

Consumed Connection Size (Note 1)

(Max. amount of I/O data that may be received)

Get/Set Expected Packet Rate(EPR)

Watch dog operation

0: Transition to timed out

1: Auto Delete

2: Auto reset

3: Deferred Delete


Range

0 to 5

0,1

0 to 0xFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 3

Value

0

0x82

0x01

4

4

0

0

13

14

15

16

Get

Get

Get

Produced Connection Path (Note 2)


Consumed Connection Path (Note 2)

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFF

0 to 0xFF

0 to 0xFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFF

0 to 0xFF

0 to 0xFF

3

0x62

0x34

0x37

3

0x62

0x31

0x35

Note 1.

Depends on the communication data used. 4 for use of output instances 20, 21 and input instances 70,

71 or 6 for use of output instance 26 and input instance 76.

Note 2.

As the Produced Connection Path and Consumed Connection Path, specify the application objects of the data to be transferred. Their structures are as follows.

0x62 0xMM 0xNN

0x62 (=logical address)

0xMM 0xNN: Application object data. The I/O instance numbers (hexadecimal) represented in

ASCII.

Example: When output instance 21 and input instance 71 are used as communication data

(a) Produced Connection Path (send data)

Input instance 71 = 0x47

ASCII code: 4 = 0x34, 7 = 0x37

Hence, Produced Connection Path = 0x62 0x34 0x37

(b) Consumed Connection Path (receive data)

Output instance 21 = 0x15

ASCII code: 1 = 0x31, 5 = 0x35

Hence, Consumed Connection Path = 0x62 0x31 0x35

Note 3.

For detailed definitions, refer to the DeviceNet specifications Vol. I 5-4.

101


Attribute No.

13

14

15

16

8

9

12

5

6

3

4

7

1

2

Access

Get

Get/Set

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Description

Connection status








Expected Packet Rate(EPR)

Watch dog operation


Produced Connection Path




Attribute No.

14

15

16

7

8

9

12

13

4

5

6

1

2

3

Access

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get/Set

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Description

Connection status









Watch dog operation






Attribute No.

13

14

15

16

8

9

12

5

6

3

4

7

1

2

Access

Get

Get/Set

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Description

Connection status









Watch dog operation





(6) Class 0x05 Instance 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 services

Service Code

0x0E

0x10

Service



102

Device Net

TM

Range

0 to 5

0,1

0 to 0xFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 3

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFF

0

0 to 0xFF

Value

0

0x83

0x22

7

7

0x09c4

1

0

0

0

0x33

Range

0 to 5

0,1

0 to 0xFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 3

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFF

0

0 to 0xFF

Value

0

0x83

0x22

7

7

0x09c4

1

0

0

0

0

Range

0 to 5

0,1

0 to 0xFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 3

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFF

0

0 to 0xFF

Value

0

0x83

0x22

7

7

0x09c4

1

0

0

0

0

Device Net

TM

3.9.5 Class 0x28 Motor data object


Attribute No.

Access

3

9

12

15

6

7

8

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Description

Motor type

7: Squirrel-cage induction motor

Rated motor current (Pr. 9 "Electronic thermal O/L relay")

Rated motor voltage (Pr. 83)

Motor capacity (Pr. 80)

Rated motor frequency (Pr. 84)

Number of motor poles (Pr. 81)

Base frequency (Pr. 3)

Note 1.

Pr. 80 to Pr. 84 are not available for the FR-F500.

Note 2.

For detailed definitions, refer to the DeviceNet specifications Vol. II 6-28.

Range

0 to 10

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFFFF

0 to 0xFFFF


Service Code

0x0E

0x10

Service



Value

7 (fixed value)

0x00FF

0x07D0

0xFFFF

0x1770

4

0x0708

3.9.6 Class 0x29 Control management object


Attribute No.

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

12

15

16

Access

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get/Set

Get

Get/Set

Description

Forward rotation

0: Stop

1: Forward rotation

Reverse rotation

0: Stop

1: Reverse rotation

Operation command write (Pr. 338) (Note 1)

0: Other than DeviceNet communication operation

1: DeviceNet communication operation

(The actual operation command right status can be monitored using Attribute No. 15.)

Status

1: Start up

2: Not Ready

3: Ready

4: Enabled

5: Stopping

6: Fault-Stop

7: Faulted


0: Without forward rotation command

1: With forward rotation command

Reverse rotation command

0: Without reverse rotation command

1: With reverse rotation command

Ready

0: Communication disabled

1: Communication enabled

Error

0: Without error

1: Error occurrence (latch)

Error reset (Note 2)

0: Reset canceled

1: Reset executed

Operation command write monitor (Note 3)



DN failure mode

(Operation performed when communication is broken)

0: Error occurrence and stop

Input assembly

Output assembly

Range

0, 1

0, 1

0, 1

1 to 7

0, 1

0, 1

0, 1

0, 1

0, 1

0, 1

0

Value

0

0

1

3

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

40

41

Get/Set

Get/Set

70 to 76

20 to 26

0x47(71)

0x15(21)

Note 1.

The logic is opposite to that of Pr. 338. (Attribute No. 5 = 1 is equivalent to Pr. 338 = 0.)

Note 2.

After setting data to 1 and executing a reset, a reset cannot be executed again unless the data is set to 0 once to cancel a reset.

Note 3.

This data is updated only after an inverter reset or operation cycle.

Note 4.


103

Device Net

TM


Service Code

0x0E

0x10

Service



3.9.7 Class 0x2A AC drive object

(1) Class 0x2A Instance 1 attributes

AC Profile Compatibles

Attribute No.

1

3

4

15

17

18

19

6

7

8

9

20

21

29

Access

Get

Get

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get

Get/Set

Get

Get

Get

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get

Description

Number of attributes supported

Up to frequency

1: Speed reaches the speed command value.

Speed command write (Pr. 339) (Note 1)



(The actual speed command right status can be monitored using Attribute

No. 29.)

Operation mode

Actual speed

Speed setting

Actual current

Actual power

Output voltage

Acceleration time (Pr. 7)

Deceleration time (Pr. 8)

Minimum frequency (Pr. 2)

Maximum frequency (Pr. 1)

Speed command write monitor (Note 2)



Note 1.

The logic is opposite to that of Pr. 339. (Attribute No. 4 = 1 is equivalent to Pr. 339 = 0.)

Note 2.

This data is updated only after an inverter reset or operation cycle.

Note 3.


The following variables and parameters are specific to the FR-A500 series.

System Environment Variables

Attribute No.

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

112

113

114

115

120

Access

Set

Set

Set

Set

Set

Set

Set

Set

Get/Set

Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Description

User clear setting

Inverter reset

Parameter clear

All parameter clear

Parameter user clear

Parameter clear (external communication parameters)

All parameter clear (external communication parameters)

Parameter user clear (external communication parameters)

Running frequency (RAM) (Note 1)

Running frequency (EEPROM) (Note 1)

Inverter status/control input command (Note 2)

Jog operation frequency (setting)

Operation mode read (Get)

0: External operation

1: PU operation

2: External jog

3: PU jog


5: PU-external combined operation

6: Programmed operation

Operation mode write (Set)

0x10: External operation

0x11: PU operation

0x14: DeviceNet communication operation

(The operation mode may be changed to the PU operation mode from communication only when Pr. 79 = 6.)

Note 1.

Data of No. 112 and 113 can be read from No. 112.

Note 2.

Inverter status (Get) b7

ABC b6

FU b5

IPF b4

OL b3

SU b2 b1

Reverse rotation

Forward rotation b0

RUN

Control input command (Set) b15-b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2

Value

1

0

0 (fixed value)

0

0

0

0

0

0x0032

0x0032

0

0xFFFF

1

Value

0

0

0x965A

0x99AA

0x5A55

0x5A96

0xAA99

0x555A

30.00Hz

30.00Hz

5.00Hz

b1

1 b0

0 MRS CS(*) AU(*) RT(*) JOG(*) RL(*) RM(*) RH(*) STR STF 0


104

Device Net

TM

Code

0x30

0x31

0x40

0x50

0x51

0x60

0x10

0x11

0x12

0x20

0x21

0x22

Monitor items

Attribute No.

148

170

171

172

174

175

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

176

177

178

179

186

187

188

189

191

192

193

194

180

182

183

184

185


Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get/Set Alarm history 1 (Note 1)/all alarm history clear (Note 2)

Get Alarm history 2 (Note 1)

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Alarm history 3 (Note 1)





Get

Get

Get

Get


Output frequency (minimum setting increments 0.01Hz)

Output current (minimum setting increments 0.1A)

Output voltage (minimum setting increments 0.1V)

Frequency setting (minimum setting increments 0.01Hz)

Running speed (minimum setting increments 1r/min)

Motor torque (minimum setting increments 0.1%)

Converter voltage (minimum setting increments 0.1V)

Brake duty (minimum setting increments 0.1%)

Electronic overcurrent protection load factor (minimum setting increments 0.1%)

Peak current (minimum setting increments 0.01A) Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Input power (minimum setting increments 0.01kW)

Output power (minimum setting increments 0.01kW)

Input terminal status (Note 3)

Output terminal status (Note 3)

Load meter (minimum setting increments 0.1%)

Motor exciting current (minimum setting increments 0.01A)

Position pulse (minimum setting increments 1 pulse) (Note 4)

Cumulative energization time (minimum setting increments 1 hr)


Actual operation time (minimum setting increments 1 hr)

Motor load factor (minimum setting increments 0.1%)

Cumulative power (minimum setting increments 1kwh)

Note 1.

For the alarm history, refer to the following alarm code-alarm definition correspondence table.

Note 2.

Writing any value clears the alarm history.

Note 3.

For the terminal monitor bit map, refer to Section 3.7 (2) Monitoring (page 87).

Note 4.

Valid only when the FR-A5AP is plugged in.

Value

0

Definition

THT

THM

FIN

IPF

UVT

OLT

OC1

OC2

OC3

OV1

OV2

OV3

Alarm code list

Code

0xA2

0xA3

0xB0

0xB1

0xB2

0xC0

0x70

0x80

0x81

0x90

0xA0

0xA1

Definition

OP2

OP3

PE

PUE

RET

CPU

BE

GF

LF

OHT

OPT

OP1

Code

0xC1

0xC2

0xD5

0xD6

0xD7

0xD8

0xD9

0xDA

0xDB

0xF6

0xF7

Definition

CTE

P24

Mb1

Mb2

Mb3

Mb4

Mb5

Mb6

Mb7

E6

E7

(2) Class 0x2A Instance 1 services

Service Code

0x0E

0x10

Service



105

Device Net

TM

Attribute No.

14

15

16

17

18

10

11

12

13

19

45

46

47

51

52

42

43

44

39

40

41

34

35

36

37

38

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

31

32

33

26

27

28

29

30

23

24

25

20

21

22

Access

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

3.9.8 Class 0x66 A500 expansion object I


Pr. 9

Pr. 32

Pr. 33

Pr. 34

Pr. 35

Pr. 36

Pr. 37

Pr. 41

Pr. 42

Pr. 24

Pr. 25

Pr. 26

Pr. 27

Pr. 28

Pr. 29

Pr. 30

Pr. 31

Pr. 43

Pr. 44

Pr. 45

Pr. 46

Pr. 47

Pr. 48

Pr. 49

Pr. 10

Pr. 11

Pr. 12

Pr. 13

Pr. 14

Pr. 15

Pr. 16

Pr. 17

Pr. 18

Pr. 19

Pr. 20

Pr. 21

Pr. 22

Pr. 23

A500 Pr.

Number

Pr. 0

Pr. 1

Pr. 2

Pr. 3

Pr. 4

Pr. 5

Pr. 6

Pr. 7

Pr. 8

Parameters

Description

Torque boost (manual)

Maximum frequency

Minimum frequency

Base frequency

Multi-speed setting (high speed)

Multi-speed setting (middle speed)

Multi-speed setting (low speed)

Acceleration time

Deceleration time

Electronic thermal O/L relay

DC injection brake operation frequency

DC injection brake operation time

DC injection brake voltage

Starting frequency

Load pattern selection

Jog frequency

Jog acceleration/deceleration time

MRS input selection

High-speed maximum frequency (Note 1)

Base frequency voltage

Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency

Acceleration/deceleration time increments

Stall prevention operation level

Stall prevention operation level at double speed

Multi-speed setting (speed 4)




Multi-speed input compensation

Acceleration/deceleration pattern

Regenerative function selection

Frequency jump 1A

Frequency jump 1B

Frequency jump 2A

Frequency jump 2B

Frequency jump 3A

Frequency jump 3B

Speed display

Up-to-frequency sensitivity

Output frequency detection

Output frequency detection for reverse rotation

Second acceleration/deceleration time

Second deceleration time

Second torque boost

Second V/F (base frequency)

Second stall prevention operation current

Second stall prevention operation frequency

Value

0

150.0%

655.35Hz

655.35Hz

655.35Hz

655.35Hz

655.35Hz

0

0

0

655.35Hz

655.35Hz

655.35Hz

655.35Hz

655.35Hz

655.35Hz

0

10.0%

6.00Hz

655.35Hz

5.0s

6553.5s

6553.5%

655.35Hz

150.0%

30.00Hz

6.0%

120.00Hz

0.00Hz

60.00Hz

60.00Hz

30.00Hz

10.00Hz

5.0s

5.0s

Rated output current

3.00Hz

0.5s

0

0.5Hz

0

5.00Hz

0.5s

0

120.00Hz

6553.5V

60.00Hz

106

Access

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Attribute No.

80

81

82

77

78

79

83

84

85

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

99

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

90

91

92

93

94

86

87

88

89

67

68

69

70

75

76

63

64

65

60

61

62

66

Device Net

TM

Pr. 67

Pr. 68

Pr. 69

Pr. 70

Pr. 71

Pr. 72

Pr. 73

Pr. 74

Pr. 75

Pr. 100

Pr. 101

Pr. 102

Pr. 103

Pr. 104

Pr. 105

Pr. 106

Pr. 107

Pr. 108

Pr. 109

Pr. 110

Pr. 89

Pr. 90

Pr. 91

Pr. 92

Pr. 93

Pr. 94

Pr. 95

Pr. 96

Pr. 76

Pr. 77

Pr. 78

Pr. 79

Pr. 80

Pr. 81

Pr. 82

Pr. 83

Pr. 84

A500 Pr.

Number

Pr. 50

Pr. 51

Pr. 52

Pr. 53

Pr. 54

Pr. 55

Pr. 56

Pr. 57

Pr. 58

Pr. 59

Pr. 60

Pr. 65

Pr. 66

Parameters

Description

Second output frequency detection

Inverter LED display data selection

DU/PU main display data selection

PU level display data selection

FM terminal function selection

Frequency monitoring reference

Current monitoring reference

Restart coasting time

Restart cushion time

Remote setting function selection

Intelligent mode selection

Retry selection

Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency

Number of retries at alarm occurrence

Retry waiting time

Retry count display erasure

Special regenerative brake duty (Note 1)

Applied motor

PWM frequency selection

0-5V/0-10V selection

Filter time constant

Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection

Alarm code output selection

Parameter write disable

Reverse rotation prevention selection

Operation mode selection

Motor capacity (Note 1)

Number of motor poles (Note 1)

Motor exciting current (Note 1)

Rated motor voltage (Note 1)

Rated motor frequency (Note 1)

Speed control gain (Note 1)

Motor constant R1 (Note 1)

Motor constant R2 (Note 1)

Motor constant L1 (Note 1)

Motor constant L2 (Note 1)

Motor constant X (Note 1)

Online auto tuning selection (Note 1)

Auto tuning setting/status (Note 1)

V/F1 (first frequency)

V/F1 (first frequency voltage)

V/F2 (second frequency)

V/F2 (second frequency voltage)

V/F3 (third frequency)

V/F3 (third frequency voltage)

V/F4 (fourth frequency)

V/F4 (fourth frequency voltage)

V/F5 (fifth frequency)

V/F5 (fifth frequency voltage)

Third acceleration/deceleration time (Note 1)

Value

0.01Hz

1

0

0

1.0s

0

0.0%

0

2kHz

1

1

14

1

60.00Hz

Rated output current

9999

1.0s

0

0

0

60.00Hz

0

0

0

0

655.35kW

65535

655.35A

Rated voltage

60.00Hz

100.0%

65535

65535

65535

65535

65535

0

0

655.35Hz

0.0V

655.35Hz

0.0V

655.35Hz

0.0V

655.35Hz

0.0V

655.35Hz

0.0V

6553.5s

107

Access

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Attribute No.

145

146

147

148

129

130

131

132

133

134

138

139

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

140

141

142

143

144

165

166

167

168

170

172

173

174

175

180

181

183

149

158

159

160

161

162

163

150

151

152

153

154

164

Device Net

TM

Pr. 139

Pr. 140

Pr. 141

Pr. 142

Pr. 143

Pr. 144

Pr. 148

Pr. 149

Pr. 150

Pr. 151

Pr. 152

Pr. 153

Pr. 154

Pr. 155

Pr. 156

Pr. 157

Pr. 158

Pr. 160

Pr. 162

Pr. 163

Pr. 164

Pr. 165

Pr. 170

Pr. 171

Pr. 173

A500 Pr.

Number

Pr. 119

Pr. 120

Pr. 121

Pr. 122

Pr. 123

Pr. 124

Pr. 128

Pr. 129

Pr. 111

Pr. 112

Pr. 113

Pr. 114

Pr. 115

Pr. 116

Pr. 117

Pr. 118

Pr. 130

Pr. 131

Pr. 132

Pr. 133

Pr. 134

Pr. 135

Pr. 136

Pr. 137

Pr. 138

Parameters

Description

Third deceleration time (Note 1)

Third torque boost (Note 1)

Third V/F (base frequency) (Note 1)

Third stall prevention operation current (Note 1)

Third stall prevention operation frequency (Note 1)

Third output frequency detection

Station number

Communication speed

Stop bit length




Waiting time setting


PID action selection

PID proportional band

PID integral time

PID upper limit

PID lower limit

PID action set point for PU operation

PID differential time

Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over sequence output terminal selection

MC switch-over interlock time

Start waiting time

Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over selection at alarm occurrence

Automatic inverter-commercial power supply switch-over frequency

Backlash acceleration stopping frequency

Backlash acceleration stopping time

Backlash deceleration stopping frequency

Backlash deceleration stopping time

Speed setting switch-over

Stall prevention level at 0V input


Output current detection level (Note 1)

Output current detection period (Note 1)

Zero current detection level

Zero current detection period

Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation

RT activated condition

Stall prevention operation selection

OL signal waiting time

AM terminal function selection

User group read selection

Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection

First cushion time for restart

First cushion voltage for restart

Restart stall prevention operation level

Watt-hour meter clear

Actual operation hour meter clear

User group 1 registration

Value

6553.5s

6553.5%

655.35Hz

150.0%

0.00%

655.35Hz

0

192

1

2

1

0.0s

65535ms

1

10

10.0%

1.0s

6553.5%

6553.5%

0.00%

6553.5s

0

1.0s

0.5s

0

0

0

0.0

1

1

0

9999

1.00Hz

0.5s

1.00Hz

0.5s

4

0

0

150.0%

0.0s

5.0%

0.5s

1

0.0s

0.0%

150.0%

0

0

0

108

Device Net

TM

Parameters

Attribute No.

219

241

242

243

215

216

217

218

209

212

213

214

202

203

204

205

244

245

195

196

200

201

191

192

193

194

184

185

186

190

246

Access

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

A500 Pr.

Number

Pr. 235

Pr. 236

Pr. 237

Pr. 238

Pr. 239

Pr. 261

Pr. 262

Pr. 263

Pr. 192

Pr. 193

Pr. 194

Pr. 195

Pr. 199

Pr. 232

Pr. 233

Pr. 234

Pr. 264

Pr. 265

Pr. 174

Pr. 175

Pr. 176

Pr. 180

Pr. 181

Pr. 182

Pr. 183

Pr. 184

Pr. 185

Pr. 186

Pr. 190

Pr. 191

Pr. 266

Description

User group 1 deletion



RL terminal function selection

RM terminal function selection

RH terminal function selection

RT terminal function selection

AU terminal function selection

JOG terminal function selection

CS terminal function selection

RUN terminal function selection

SU terminal function selection

IPF terminal function selection

OL terminal function selection

FU terminal function selection

ABC terminal function selection

User's initial value setting

Multi-speed setting (speed 8) (Note 1)








Power failure stop function (Note 1)

Subtracted frequency at deceleration start (Note 1)

Subtraction starting frequency (Note 1)

Power-failure deceleration time 1 (Note 1)

Power-failure deceleration time 2 (Note 1)

Power-failure deceleration time switch-over frequency (Note 1)

Value

4

99

2

3

0

655.35Hz

655.35Hz

655.35Hz

655.35Hz

655.35Hz

655.35Hz

655.35Hz

655.35Hz

0

3.00Hz

60.00Hz

5.0s

6553.5s

0

1

5

6

3

4

1

2

0

0

0

0

60.00Hz

Note 1.

Parameters designed for the FR-A500 only. Not supported by the FR-F500.

Note 2.

Values 65535, 6553.5 and 655.35 indicate that the functions are invalid and have the same meaning as

9999 displayed on the DU/PU.

Note 3.

For details, refer to the FR-A500 or FR-F500 instruction manual.

Note 4.

A change in the No. 31 value changes the setting increments of the inverter but is not reflected on

DeviceNet.


Service Code

0x0E

0x10

Service



109

Device Net

TM

10

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

39

40

42

45

46

67

68

100

22

23

24

25

38

19

20

21

15

16

18

11

12

13

14

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

3.9.9 Class 0x67 A500 expansion object II


Parameters

Attribute No.

Access

A500 Pr.

Number

Pr. 270

Pr. 201

Pr. 201

Pr. 201

Pr. 202

Pr. 202

Pr. 202

Pr. 203

Pr. 203

Pr. 339

Pr. 340

Pr. 342

Pr. 345

Pr. 346

Pr. 367

Pr. 368

Pr. 200

Pr. 271

Pr. 272

Pr. 273

Pr. 274

Pr. 275

Pr. 276

Pr. 278

Pr. 279

Pr. 280

Pr. 281

Pr. 282

Pr. 283

Pr. 284

Pr. 285

Pr. 338

Pr. 206

Pr. 206

Pr. 207

Pr. 207

Pr. 207

Pr. 208

Pr. 208

Pr. 208

Pr. 209

Pr. 209

Pr. 203

Pr. 204

Pr. 204

Pr. 204

Pr. 205

Pr. 205

Pr. 205

Pr. 206

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get

Get

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Description

Stop-on-contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection

High-speed setting maximum current

Mid-speed setting minimum current

Current averaging range

Current averaging filter constant

Stop-on-contact exciting current low-speed multiplying factor

Stop-on-contact PWM carrier frequency

Brake opening frequency

Brake opening current

Brake opening current detection time

Brake operation time at start

Brake closing frequency

Brake operation time at stop

Deceleration detection function selection

Overspeed detection frequency

Operation command right

Speed command right


EEPROM write setting by PC link/computer link

DeviceNet address start data

DeviceNet baud rate start data

Speed feedback range

Feedback gain

Programmed operation minute/second selection

Program setting 1 time

Program setting 1 direction

Program setting 1 frequency
























Value

0

0

0

0

41023

20612

0

0

0

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

50.0%

100.0%

655.35Hz

16

6553.5%

65535

3.00Hz

130.0%

0.3s

0.3s

6.00Hz

0.3s

0

655.35Hz

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

110

Attribute No.

167

168

169

170

163

164

165

166

159

160

161

162

155

156

157

158

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

151

152

153

154

147

148

149

150

143

144

145

146

139

140

141

142

135

136

137

138

131

132

133

134

127

128

129

130

Access

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Parameters

A500 Pr. Number

Pr. 221

Pr. 222

Pr. 222

Pr. 222

Pr. 223

Pr. 223

Pr. 223

Pr. 224

Pr. 219

Pr. 219

Pr. 219

Pr. 220

Pr. 220

Pr. 220

Pr. 221

Pr. 221

Pr. 224

Pr. 224

Pr. 225

Pr. 225

Pr. 225

Pr. 226

Pr. 226

Pr. 216

Pr. 216

Pr. 217

Pr. 217

Pr. 217

Pr. 218

Pr. 218

Pr. 218

Pr. 213

Pr. 214

Pr. 214

Pr. 214

Pr. 215

Pr. 215

Pr. 215

Pr. 216

Pr. 209

Pr. 210

Pr. 210

Pr. 210

Pr. 211

Pr. 211

Pr. 211

Pr. 212

Pr. 212

Pr. 212

Pr. 213

Pr. 213

Description




















































Device Net

TM

Value

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

111

Device Net

TM

Parameters

Attribute No.

186

187

188

189

182

183

184

185

178

179

180

181

190

191

Access

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

A500 Pr. Number

Pr. 226

Pr. 227

Pr. 227

Pr. 227

Pr. 228

Pr. 228

Pr. 228

Pr. 229

Pr. 229

Pr. 229

Pr. 230

Pr. 230

Pr. 230

Pr. 231

Description














Timer setting

The relationships between PU reading and DeviceNet reading are as follows:

PU = hh: mm DeviceNet = tt = 256 × mm + hh Example: 4 hours 45 minutes

DeviceNet = tt PU = mm = Quotient of (tt/256) hh = tt - 256 × mm

PU = 4 : 45,Devicenet = tt = 256 × 45 + 4 = 11524

DeviceNet = tt = 11524,PU = mm = 11524/256 = 45 hh = 11524 - (256 × 45) = 4

Value

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0.00 time

0

6553.5Hz

0

Attribute No.

205

206

207

208

209

200

201

202

203

204

Access

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Parameters

A500 Pr. Number

Pr. 900

Pr. 901

Pr. 902

Pr. 902

Pr. 903

Pr. 903

Pr. 904

Pr. 904

Pr. 905

Pr. 905

Description

FM terminal calibration

AM terminal calibration

Frequency setting voltage bias - frequency

Frequency setting voltage bias - percentage

Frequency setting voltage gain - frequency

Frequency setting voltage gain - percentage

Frequency setting current bias - frequency

Frequency setting current bias - percentage

Frequency setting current gain - frequency

Frequency setting current gain - percentage

Value

1359

3522

0.00Hz

0.0%

60.00Hz

97.0%

0.00Hz

18.8%

60.00Hz

92.7%

Note 1.

No. 10 to 25, 67, 68 and 100 to 191 are designed for the FR-A500 only. Not supported by the FR-F500.

Note 2.

Values 65535, 6553.5 and 655.35 indicate that the functions are invalid and have the same meaning as

9999 displayed on the DU/PU.

Note 3.

For details, refer to the FR-A500 or FR-F500 instruction manual.


Service Code

0x0E

0x10

Service



112

3.10 EDS File

Device Net

TM

3.10 EDS File

(1) Outline of EDS file

When using the configuration software, the EDS file is required to connect the inverter and configurator.

The EDS file is designed to offer information on the settings (including the parameter object addresses) between configurator and inverter.

(2) Acquiring method

You can get the FR-A500 series EDS file in the following method:

! Download it from the Internet.

It can be downloaded free on the Web site of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association: http://www.odva.org

(3) Using method

The A500.EDS file is created for the ODVA standard and assumes that the DeviceNet Manager

TM

product of

Rockwell Automation is used.

For the appropriate installation method of the EDS file, refer to the DeviceNet configuration software manual.

Note 1.

DeviceNet Manager

TM

is a registered trademark of Allen-Bradley Company, Inc.

Note 2.

The above EDS file applies to the FR-A500 series only. Consult us separately when using the FR-F500 series.

113

4

Profibus-DP

4.1 Overview .............................................................................................. 114

4.2 Specifications ....................................................................................... 115

4.3 Structure............................................................................................... 116

4.4 Configuration and Wiring Procedure.................................................... 118

4.5 Inverter Setting..................................................................................... 121

4.6 Operation Modes.................................................................................. 122

4.7 Operational Functions .......................................................................... 125

4.8 Profibus Programming ......................................................................... 127

4.9 Parameter Definitions........................................................................... 136

4.10 Profibus Device Data (GSD File) ....................................................... 146

4.1 Overview

Profibus-DP

Profibus-DP was released in 1994. PNO (Profibus Netzer Organization) set up offices in 15 countries, and Profibus

International for integration of global management was established in 1995 for business operations. As an open field network, Profibus-DP allows a wide variety of devices of third parties to be connected, and is applicable to not only inverters but also various field-level applications.

(1) Features

Connection with the master module (personal computer/PLC) by communication cables allows inverters to be run and monitored and their parameter values to be read/written from a user program.

(2) Types of Profibus-DP-compatible inverters

Inverter Series

FR-A500

FR-F500

Method for Compatibility with Profibus-DP

Connect the FR-A5NP plug-in option.

Connect the FR-A5NP plug-in option.

114


4.2 Specifications

Item

Current consumption

Dielectric withstand voltage

Communication rate

Operating temperature

Storage temperature

Ambient humidity

Supplied to Profibus network:

100mA (5VDC)

Minimum 500VDC

1200m or less: 9,600bps.

19,200bps.

93,750bps.



1,500,000bps.

100m or less: 3,000,000bps.

6,000,000bps.

12,000,000bps.

-10 to 60 °C

-20 to 65 °C

90% maximum at 60 °C

Specifications

Profibus-DP

115

4.3 Structure

4.3 Structure

(1) Appearance

Mounting hole

Profibus-DP

M

Profibus connector

Status LED

Mounting hole


SW1

SW2

D

E

F

0 1

2

3

A

9 8

7

6

D

E

F

0 1

2

3

A

9 8

7

6

FR-A5NP front view

Status LED

Profibus connector


Mounting holes

Option connector

(2) Part names

Name Function


Status LED

SW1

SW2

D

E

F

0 1

2

3

5

9

A

B

8

7

6

B

D

E

F

0 1

2

3

9

A

8

7

6

5

Used to set the node address of the inverter within the range 00 to

7E

H

.

Do not set the node address to 7F

H

-FF

H

. If it is set to any of such addresses, the option unit will not operate properly. In addition, do not set the same node address to two or more options.

SW1 is used to set the minimum digit. For example, when setting the node address to 7B

H

(123 in decimal system), set SW2 to 7 and

SW1 to B.

When the status is normal, the green LED is lit.

116

Profibus-DP


1) Remove the front cover of the inverter and insert this option unit into slot 3 of the inverter.

2) Securely insert the option unit connector into the inverter connector. At this time, also align the option fixing hole correctly.

3) Then, securely fix the option unit to the inverter with the mounting screws (2 places). If the mounting holes of the option unit do not match the inverter mounting holes, recheck whether the connector is secured properly.

4) Remove the DATA PORT from the inverter front cover and reinstall the front cover.

(To remove the DATA PORT cover, push it from the back of the front cover.)

Mounting screw

FR-A5NP plug-in option

Option connector

FR-A500 (FR-F500) series inverter

Slot 3

FR-A5NP

Profibus connector

Slot 1

Slot 2

Mounting screw holes


PU connector

Alarm lamp

Power lamp

117

4.4 Configuration and Wiring Procedure

4.4 Configuration and Wiring Procedure


Master module

Profibus-DP

INV INV INV

Slave station Slave station Slave station

Connection with Profibus-DP network

(2) Fabrication of cable

1) Plug one end of the cable to the connector linked to the network, and the other end to the DB9 type male connector. Make sure that the cable supports 12.0Mbps communication (specified in the EEIA-RS-485

Standard). For the connection of this cable, refer to the PROFIBUS connector terminal specifications given below.

+5VDC (permissible current 100mA) is supplied from the option unit pin numbers 6 and 5. You can select whether pins 6 and 5 are used or not. Pin number 4 may not be required depending on the master used and this can also be selected. (For more information, refer to the ProfibusDP master manual.)

1 2

6 7

3

8

4 5

9

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

NC

NC

RXD/TXD + (POS)

RTS FROM OPTION UNIT

DATA GROUND

+ 5 VOLTS DC

NC

RXD/TXD – (NEG)

NC

Profibus connector (DB-9 male) terminal specifications

Connector mounting screws

Profibus connector DB-9 male

Communication cable (to next network)

Communication cable (from network)

1

6

2

7

3

8

4

9

5

Perspective view of PROFIBUS standard junction connector

118

Profibus-DP

The DB9 connector pin layout is listed below. This layout is defined in Profibus Standard DIN-19-245, Part 1.

DB-9 Pin

Number

7

8

5

6

9

3

4

1

2

NC: No connection

FR-A5NP Signal Name

NC

NC

RxD/TxD+

CNTR+

Isolated GND

Isolated +5V output

NC

RxD/TxD-

NC

Profibus-DP Signal Name

NC

RP

RxD/TxD+

CNTR+

DGND(V-)

V+

NC

RxD/TxD-

RP

Remarks

Not connected

Reserved for module power supply

Transferred data (+)

Control signal (request to send)

Data ground

+5V voltage

Not connected

Transferred data (-)

Reserved for module power supply

2) When the option unit is used to connect the network, connect the PROFIBUS connector which contains a termination resistor.

390

Ω

220

Ω

390

Ω

1 2

6 7

3

8

4 5

9

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

1.

2.

3.

4.

NC

NC

RXD/TXD + (POS)

RTS FROM OPTION UNIT

DATA GROUND

+ 5 VOLTS DC

NC

RXD/TXD – (NEG)

NC

Ru = 390

Ω

Rt = 220

Ω

Rd = 390

Ω

Profibus connector (DB-9 male) termination resistor connection specifications (all resistors 0.25W)


Profibus communication cable


Appearance of PROFIBUS connector with built-in termination resistor



Communication cable (from network)

1

6

2

7

3

8

4

9

5

Perspective view of PROFIBUS connector with built-in termination resistor

119

Profibus-DP

(3) Wiring procedure

1) Power off the inverter and make sure that the working environment is safe.

After ensuring safety, remove the inverter cover.

2) Set the node address using the two node address setting switches of the option unit. Valid addresses are 00

H

to

7E

H

(0 to 126 in decimal system). However, since addresses 00

H

, 01

H

, 02

H

, 7C

H

, 7D

H

and 7E

H

(0, 1, 2, 124, 125,

126 in decimal system) may be used for the master station and repeater depending on the master used, it is recommended to use 03

H

to 7B

H

(3 to 123 in decimal system) which may be used for any master. Set the node address to the value at which communication will be established by the Profibus master. Communication will not be established unless the master recognizes the node address assigned to the FR-5ANP. Refer to the master manual for more information on the master.

Do not set the node address to 7F

H

-FF

H

. If it is set to any of such addresses, the option unit will not operate properly. In addition, do not set the same node address to two or more options.

SW1 is used to set the minimum digit. For example, when setting the node address to 7B

H

(123 in decimal system), set SW2 to 7 and SW1 to B.

3) When the inverters have been installed properly and the node addresses set correctly, reinstall the inverter covers. Then, insert the DB-9 male connector of the Profibus cable into the DB-9 female connector (Profibus connector) of the option unit to connect the Profibus cable.

4) Power on the inverters after making sure that connection is all completed and the inverters' external cables and

Profibus network cable are run properly.

(4) LED status indications

After connecting the option unit to the active network, check the status of the operating status indicator LED. After power-on or reset, the LED indication is normally either of the following:

Light off

Light on

LED (Green) System Status

The module is not powered on. The module is being subjected to a start test. The module is in the data exchange mode. Alternatively, network connection has timed out.

The module is operating properly. The data exchange mode is ready.

120


Profibus-DP


(1) Baud rate setting

Set the baud rate on the master module. The inverter recognizes the baud rate automatically and starts communication.

(2) Node address setting

The node address assigned to the inverter is determined when the inverter is powered on. Do not change the setting while power is on. Refer to Section 4.3 (2) for the way to set the node address.

(3) Parameters

Parameter

Number

338 (Note 1)

339 (Note 1)

340 (Note 1)

Function


Speed command write


Setting Range

0, 1

0, 1

0, 1, 2

Minimum

Setting

Increments

1

1

1

Note 1.

Refer to Section 4.6 Operation Modes (page 122) for details of Pr. 338 to 340.

Factory Setting

0

0

0

121


Profibus-DP

4.6 Operation Modes


1) PU operation : Controls the inverter from the keyboard of the operation panel (FR-DU04) or parameter unit (FR-PU04) installed to the inverter.

2) External operation : Controls the inverter by switching on/off external signals connected to the control circuit terminals of the inverter.

3) Profibus operation : Controls the inverter in accordance with the program via the Profibus-DP unit (FR-A5NP).





! Both the STF and STR signals are off; and



Pr. 79 Setting Operation Mode Selection

0

1

2

3, 4

5

6

7

8


PU operation mode




Switch-over



Switching to Profibus Operation Mode


Disallowed

Allowed

Disallowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Allowed only in the external operation mode when the PU interlock signal (X12) is on.



Switched by program

C

Profibus-DP

D

External operation

Switched by

PU operation

A

B

PU operation

E


Symbol

A

B

C

D

E

F

Switching Type Switching Method

PU operation external operation Operate the external operation key on the PU.



External operation Profibus operation

Profibus operation external operation

PU operation Profibus operation

Profibus operation PU operation

By user program.

The master writes 0014 H to PNU00B H (IND = 0100).

By user program.

The master writes 0010 H to PNU00B H (IND = 0100).


Profibus operation is then selected in C. (Note 2)

Switching disallowed. Allowed if external operation is selected in D and PU operation is then selected in B. (Note 2)

When "1 or 2" is set in Pr. 340 "link start mode selection", the Profibus operation mode is selected at power-on or inverter reset.

Once the network operation mode has started, Profibus communication is made at least once during 5 seconds.

If the option unit does not respond to Profibus communication for longer than 5 seconds, an option module alarm stop occurs. In that case, reset the inverter to clear the error.

Note 1.


Note 2.

In the switch-over operation mode (Pr. 79 = 6), switching in E and F is also allowed.

122

Profibus-DP

3) Link start mode

By setting the Pr. 340 value as appropriate, you can select the operation mode at power on or at restoration from instantaneous power failure.

Pr. 340 Setting

Pr.79

Operation Mode


Power Failure

0

0

1

2

3

4

5

6


PU operation

External operation



Programmed operation mode

Switch-over mode






Inverter is operated by the program.


7

External operation mode Shift to the PU operation mode is controlled by ON/OFF of the

X12 signal.

8



1

2

Profibus operation

Profibus automatic restart after instantaneous power failure

Inverter goes into the Profibus operation mode.


Inverter goes into the Profibus operation mode.

When Pr. 57 setting is other than 9999 (automatic restart after instantaneous power failure), automatic restart is made in the status prior to occurrence of an instantaneous power failure to continue Profibus operation, if a communication signal is not given.




! When starting Profibus operation at power-on, set "1 or 2" in Pr. 340.

123

Profibus-DP


In the Profibus operation mode, commands from the external terminals and sequence program are as listed below:


Fixed functions


0

1

2

7

8

9

3

4

5

6

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

22


Pr. 338 "operation command write" 0: Profibus 0: Profibus 1: External 1: External

Pr. 339 "speed command write" 0: Profibus 1: External 0: Profibus 1: External




Profibus

Profibus

Profibus

Profibus

Profibus

Profibus

External

External

External

External

External

External

Output halt (MRS)

Reset (RES)

Profibus operation frequency

2

4

1

Low-speed operation command

(RL)

Middle-speed operation command

(RM)

External

Both

Profibus

Profibus

Profibus

External

Both

External

External

External

Both

Profibus

Profibus

Profibus

External

External

External

External

External

External

Compensation External Compensation External

External

External

Remarks

(Note 1)

Pr. 59 = 0

Pr. 59 = 0

High-speed operation command

(RH)



Jog operation selection (JOG)




Third function (X9)



PU external interlock (X12)

External DC dynamic braking start

(X13)

PID control valid terminal (X14)

Profibus

Profibus

External

External

Profibus

Profibus

External

External

External

Profibus

Profibus

External

Profibus

External

External

External

External

Profibus

External

External

External

Profibus

External

Profibus

External

External

External

External

Profibus

External

External

External

External

External

Profibus

External

External

External

External

External

External

External Pr. 59 = 0

External

External

External

External

External

External

Pr. 59 = 0

Brake opening completion signal

(BRI)


Load pattern selectionforward/reverse rotation boost switching (X17)


Load torque high-speed frequency

(X19)

Orientation command

Remote setting (RH, RM, RH)

Profibus

External

Profibus

Profibus

Profibus

Profibus

Profibus

Profibus

External

Profibus

Profibus

Profibus

Profibus

External

External

External

External

External

External

External

Profibus

External

External

External

External

External

Programmed operation group selection (RH, RM, RL)



Profibus

Profibus

External

Profibus

Profibus

External

External (Note 2)

External Pr. 59 = 1, 2

Pr. 79 = 5

Profibus operation disallowed

External

External

Pr. 270 = 1, 3

[Explanation of table]


Profibus

Both

: Control from program is only valid.

: Control from both external terminal and Profibus is valid.

Compensation

: Control from both external terminal and Profibus is invalid.

: Control by signal from external terminal is only valid if Pr. 28 (multi-speed input compensation) setting is 1.

Note 1.


(Pr. 30 = 2) or if the PU operation interlock signal (X12) is not assigned when the PU operation interlock function is set (Pr. 79 = 7), this function is also used by the MRS signal and therefore the MRS signal is only valid for the external terminals, independently of the Pr. 338 and Pr. 339 settings.

Note 2.


124


Profibus-DP



Control Method Item

Net mode

Operation Mode

External mode PU mode

Profibus


Operation command


Monitoring

Parameter write

Parameter read

Inverter reset

Operation command


Inverter reset

Allowed (Note 1)

Allowed (Note 1)

Allowed

Allowed (Note 3)

Allowed

Allowed (Note 2)

Allowed (Note 1)

Allowed (Note 1)

Allowed

Disallowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Disallowed (Note 3)

Allowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Disallowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Disallowed (Note 3)

Allowed

Disallowed

Disallowed

Disallowed

Allowed

Note 1.


Note 2.

The inverter cannot be reset during occurrence of a network error.

Note 3.

As set in Pr. 77.

Note 4.

The inverter goes into the external operation mode if it is reset from Profibus during net mode operation.

(2) Monitoring

1) Output frequency .............................................. 0.01Hz minimum setting increments

2) Output current .................................................. 0.01A minimum setting increments

3) Output voltage .................................................. 0.1V minimum setting increments

4) Frequency setting ............................................. 0.01Hz minimum setting increments

5) Speed ............................................................... 1r/min minimum setting increments

6) Motor torque ..................................................... 0.1% minimum setting increments

7) Converter output voltage .................................. 0.1V minimum setting increments

8) Regenerative brake duty .................................. 0.1% minimum setting increments

9) Electronic overcurrent protection load factor .... 0.1% minimum setting increments

10) Output current peak value ................................ 0.01A minimum setting increments

11) Converter output voltage peak value ................ 0.1V minimum setting

12) Input power....................................................... 0.01kW minimum setting increments

13) utput power ...................................................... 0.01kW minimum setting increments

14) Input terminal states

15-12

0

11

CS

10

RES

9 8

STOP MRS

7

JOG

6

RH

5

RM

4

RL

3

RT

2

AU

1

STR

0

STF

15) Output terminal states

Note:

15-6

0

5

ABC

4

FU

3

OL

2

IPF

1

SU

0

RUN

The bit format data here reflects Pr. 190 to Pr. 195. When the terminal layout is changed, this bit map is also changed.

16) Load meter ....................................................... 0.1% minimum setting increments

17) Motor exciting current ....................................... 0.01A minimum setting increments

18) Position pulse

19) Cumulative energization time ........................... 1 hr minimum setting increments

20) Orientation status

21) Actual operation time........................................ 1 hr minimum setting increments

22) Motor load factor .............................................. 0.1% minimum setting increments

23) Cumulative power............................................. 1kwh minimum setting increments

24) Alarm definition

25) Inverter status

125

Profibus-DP


You can use PNU=00A

H

in the "SEV_I, Block I" area to give commands to the inverter.

15

0

14

0

13

0

12

0

11

0

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

MRS CS(*) AU(*) RT(*) JOG(*) RL(*) RM(*) RH(*) STR STF

0

0



The running frequency can be set to a minimum of 0.01Hz within the range 0 to 400Hz.

Use PNU=00D

H

, 00E

H

in the "SEV_I, Block I" area.


Functions can be written using Profibus. Note that write during inverter operation will result in a write mode error.


Functions can be read using Profibus.


Alarm Location

Inverter alarm

Profibus alarm

Description

Inverter operation

Data communication

Inverter operation

Data communication

Profibus mode

Stop

Continued

Stop

Continued (*)

Operation Mode

External mode

Stop

Continued

Continued

Continued (*)

* Depends on the communication error type.

You can reset the inverter by writing 0000

H

to PNU=001

H

in the "SEV_I, Block I" area

PU mode

Stop

Continued

Continued

Continued (*)

126

4.8 Profibus Programming

Profibus-DP

4.8 Profibus Programming

Profibus-DP programs change with the master module used. For programming details, refer to the master module instruction manual.

This option unit operates as the slave of Profibus DP relative to the controller equivalent to Profibus DP master class 1 on the PLC or RS-485 network.

It means that the option unit:

! Receives a recognizable message; and

! Sends a message at the request of the network master.

The option unit also operates as the slave of Profibus DP relative to Profibus DP master class 2 which can read the inverter I/O.

The option unit itself cannot send a message and does not have the bus access right. In addition, the option unit cannot operate simultaneously as the slave of the network master and as the master relative to the inverter (slave).

(1) I/O specifications

To access the inverter operation data, this option unit uses special Profibus profile (data buffer). This profile consists of the following 6 words (12 bytes):

Word Id Definition Communication Buffer Memory Map

1 PKE

Parameter number (PNU) and task or response Id

(AK)

Bit No.: 15 to

AK

12 11

SPM

10 to

PNU

0

SPM: Changed bit to process the parameter

change report

(Normally 0 since it is not supported)

2 IND Parameter index (category)

Bit No.: 15 to

Index

8 7 to

Value

0

3 PWE1 Set to 0 as it is not used.

Bit No.: 15 to

0

0

4 PWE2 Parameter value

Bit No.: 15 to

Parameter value (PWE2)

0

5 ZSW1

Inverter status word

Used for only the message given from the slave to the master.

This word cannot be used for the message given from the mater to the slave. Set to 0.

Bit No.: 15 to

Command count

8 7 to

Status (ZSW1)

0

6 HIW Set to 0 as it is not used.

Bit No.: 15 to

0

0

Note: The message from the master to the slave is called a command request.

The message from the slave to the master is called a command response.

Communication between the network master and slaves (option units) is defined by these 6 words through the

Profibus DP protocol. Which data word in the inverter was accessed and what access it was are indicated through this definition.

127

Profibus-DP

1) Word 1 (PKE)

Bits Id

0-10

11

12-15

PNU

AK

Definition

Parameter number (PNU)

PNU and IND (Profibus profile of Word #2) are used together to define which data word was accessed.

Section 4.9 (see page 136) lists all accessible parameters.

Set to 0 as it is not used.

Task or response Id value

AK assumes the following value as the task signal (i.e. Cdm_Req) sent from the network master to the slave:

0

H

= Without task

1

H

= Parameter value is requested: Read

2

H

= Parameter value (Word) is changed: Write

3

H to F

H

= Not supported

AK assumes the following value as the task signal (i.e. Cdm_Req) sent from the slave to the network master:

0

H

= Without response

1

H

= Parameter value (Word) is transferred

2

H

to 6

H

= Not supported

7

H

= Task is not executed (error number stored in PWE which is Word #2 of Profibus Profile)

8

H

= Without operation change right

9

H

to F

H

= Not supported

2) Word 2 (IND)

Bits Id

0-7

8-15

PP

IND

Definition

Page index

Some special parameters require the page index.

Set to 0 if it is not needed.

If IND = 01, the following cases specify different blocks of sev's in system environment variables:

0

H

= sev_i, block i

1

H

= sev_ii, block ii, alarm history

2

H

= sev_iii, block iii

Parameter index

Shows the area where the specific parameter number (PNU) is accessed (refer to Section 4.9 on page 136):

0

H

= Real-time monitor area

1

H

= System environment variable area (3 blocks)

2

H

= Standard parameter area

4

H

= Pr. 900 % calibration parameter area

6

H

= Program setting (frequency)

7

H

= Program setting (direction)

8

H

= Program setting (time)

3) Word 3 (PWE1)

Bits

0-15

Id

PWE1 Reserved and should be set to 0.

Definition

128

Profibus-DP

4) Word 4 (PWE2)

Bits Id

0-15 PWE

Definition

Parameter value

The actual data is transferred to the signal.

If a task could not be executed (AK response Id = 7), PWE indicates the type of the detected error:

0

H

= Without error

1

H

= Unsupported task

2

H

= Invalid index (IND)

3

H

= Invalid parameter number (PNU)

4

H

= Dual-port read error

5

H

= Dual-port write error

6

H

= Invalid page

41

H

= Mode error

42

H

= Instruction code error

43

H

= Data area error

5) Word 5 (ZSW1)

Messages from the slave to the master. Word #5 of Profibus Profile is used to pass the inverter status word.

Bits

0

5

6

7

3

4

1

2

8-14

Id Definition

ZSW1

Command count

1 = Running (RUN)

1 = Forward rotation operation (FWD)

1 = Reverse rotation operation (REV)

1 = Up to frequency (SU)

1 = Overload (OL)

1 = Instantaneous power failure (IPF)

1 = Frequency detection (FU)

1 = Alarm (ABC)

The command count is an optional function defined by the Profibus master and has areas 00

H

to 7F

H

.

The option unit copies the command count from the received command to the same offset in the sent response. The master uses it to synchronize the commands and responses.

Reserved and should be set to 0.

15

For messages from the slave to the master, Bits 0-7 are not used and should therefore be set to 0.

The bit format data here do not reflect Pr. 190-195.

6) Word 6 (HIW)

Bits

0-15

Id

HIW Reserved and should be set to 0.

Definition

129

Profibus-DP

(2) Data examples

Item

1) Operation mode setting

2)

Operation command setting, inverter status reading

3) Monitor function setting

4) Parameter reading

5) Parameter writing

6) Running frequency setting

7) Alarm definition reading

8) Inverter resetting

Data Example

Set to the Profibus operation mode.

Command the forward rotation and mid-speed signals and read the inverter status.

Monitor the output frequency.

Read Pr. 7 "acceleration time".

Set "3.0 seconds" in Pr. 7 "acceleration time".

Set to 50.00Hz.

Read the inverter alarm.

Reset the inverter.

Refer To

Page

130

131

132

133

133

134

134

135

1) Operation mode setting

Change the operation mode to the Profibus operation mode. Specifically, write 0014

H

to the operation mode parameter (PNU=00B

H

) of the "SEV_I" area (IND=0100

H

).

<Write data example>

Data Example

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Word 4

Word 5

Word 6

200B

H

0100

H

0000 H

0014

H

0000

H

0000

H

Description

AK = 2 (Parameter write)

SPM = 0

PNU = 00B

H

(Operation mode parameter number)

IND = 01

H

(System environment variable area)

PP = 00

H

(SEV_I, block I)

Unused

PWE2 = 0014

H

(NET mode)

Command count = 00

H

ZSW1 = 00

H

(00

H

because it is not used for write)

Unused

130

Profibus-DP

2) Operation command setting, inverter status reading

Command the forward rotation and mid-speed signals, then read the inverter status.

Set the inverter's control input using the inverter control input parameter (PNU=00A

H

) of the "SEV_I" area

(IND=0100

H

).


Data Example

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Word 4

200A

H

0100

H

0000

H

0012

H

Description


SPM = 0

PNU = 00A

H

IND = 01

H


PP = 00

H

(SEV_I, block I)

Unused b15

0 b14

0 b13

0 b12 b11

0 0 b10

0

MRS b9

0

CS b8

0

AU b7

0 b6

0 b5

0

RT JOG RL b4

1 b3

0 b2

0 b1

1

RM RH STR STF b0

0

Word 5

Word 6

0000

H

0000

H

Command count = 00

H

ZSW1 = 00

H

(00

H

because it is not used for write)

Unused

<Read data example>

Data Example

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Word 4

Word 5

Word 6

100A

H

0100

0000

0000

H

H

H

004B

H

0000

H

Description

AK = 1 (Parameter value is transferred) 7 or 8 when error occurs.

SPM = 0

PNU = 00A

H

IND = 01 H (System environment variable area)

PP = 00 H (SEV_I, block I)

Unused

0 because of no error

When error occurs, communication error code enters.

Command count = 00

H

(Command count is the same data 00

H

because of the response data to the above write data)

ZSW1 = 4B

H b7

0 b6

1 b5

0 b4

0 b3

1 b2

0 b1

1 b0

1

ABC FU IPF OL SU Reverse Forward rotation rotation

RUN

Unused

131

Profibus-DP

3) Monitor function setting

Monitor the output frequency. For monitoring, use the output frequency parameter (PNU=000

H

) of the "real-time monitor" area (IND=0000

H

).


Data Example Description

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Word 4

Word 5

Word 6

1000 H

0000

H

0000

H

0000

H

0100

H

0000

H

AK = 1 (Parameter read)

SPM = 0

PNU = 000 H (Output frequency)

IND = 00

H

(Real-time monitor area)

PP = 00

H

Unused

PWE2 = 0000

H

(Unused)

Command count = 01

H

ZSW1 = 00

H

(Unused)

Unused

<Read data example>

Data Example

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Word 4

Word 5

Word 6

1000

H

0000 H

0000

H

0BB8

H

014B

0000

H

H

Description

AK = 1 (Parameter value is transferred)

SPM = 0

PNU = 000

H

(Output frequency)

IND = 00 H (Real-time monitor area)

PP = 00 H

Unused

PWE2 = 0BB8

H

3000 (Represents 30.00Hz because of 0.01Hz increments)

Command count = 01

H

ZSW1 = 4B

H b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

0

ABC

1

FU

0

IPF

0

OL

1 0 1 1

SU Reverse rotation

Forward RUN rotation

Unused

132

Profibus-DP

4) Parameter reading

Read Pr. 7 "acceleration time". For parameter reading, use the acceleration time parameter (PNU=007

H

) of the

"standard parameter" area (IND=200

H

).


Data Example Description

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Word 4

Word 5

Word 6

1007 H

0200

H

0000

H

0000

H

0200

H

0000

H


SPM = 0

PNU = 007 H (Acceleration time)

IND = 02

H

(Standard parameter area)

PP = 00

H

Unused

PWE2 = 0000

H

(Unused)

Command count = 02

H

ZSW1 = 00

H

(Unused)

Unused

<Read data example>

Data Example

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Word 4

Word 5

Word 6

1007

H

0200 H

0000

H

0032

H

0200

H

0000

H

Description


SPM = 0

PNU = 007

H

(Acceleration time)

IND = 02 H (Standard parameter area)

PP = 00 H

Unused

PWE2 = 0032

H

50 (Represents 5.0 seconds because of 0.1 second increments)

Command count = 02

H

ZSW1 = 00

H b7

0 b6

0

ABC FU b5

0 b4

0

IPF OL b3 b2 b1 b0

0 0 0 0

SU Reverse Forward rotation rotation

RUN

Unused

5) Parameter writing

Set "3.0 seconds" in Pr. 7 "acceleration time". For parameter writing, write 001E

H

to the acceleration time parameter (PNU=007

H

) of the "standard parameter" area (IND=200

H

).


Data Example

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Word 4

Word 5

Word 6

2007

H

0200

H

0000

H

001E

H

0000

H

0000

H

Description


SPM = 0

PNU = 007

H

IND = 02

H

(Standard parameter area)

PP = 00

H

Unused

PWE2 = 001E

H

30 (Represents 3.0 seconds because of 0.1 second increments)

Command count = 00

H

ZSW1 = 00

H

(Unused)

Unused

133

Profibus-DP

6) Running frequency setting

Set the running frequency to "50.00Hz". To change the running frequency (RAM), write 1388

H

to the frequency setting (RAM) parameter (PNU=00D

H

) of the "SEV_I" area (IND=0100

H

).


Data Example

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Word 4

Word 5

Word 6

200D H

0100

H

0000

H

1388

H

0000

H

0000

H

Description


SPM = 0

PNU = 00D H (Frequency setting (RAM))

IND = 01

H


PP = 00

H

(SEV_I, block I)

Unused

PWE2 = 1388

H

5000 (Represents 50.00Hz because of 0.01Hz increments)

Command count = 00

H

ZSW1 = 00

H

(Unused)

Unused

7) Alarm definition reading

Read the inverter alarm. For alarm history reading, use the alarm 1 (PNU=000

H

) of the "SEV_II" area

(IND=0101

H

).


Data Example

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Word 4

Word 5

Word 6

1000

H

0101 H

0000

H

0000

H

0500

H

0000

H

Description


SPM = 0

PNU = 000

H

(Alarm 1)

IND = 01 H (System environment variable area)

PP = 01 H (SEV_II, block II)

Unused

PWE2 = 0000

H

(Unused)

Command count = 05

H

ZSW1 = 00

H

(Unused)

Unused

<Read data example>

Data Example

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Word 4

Word 5

Word 6

1000

H

0101

H

0000

H

00A3

H

0500

0000

H

H

Description


SPM = 0

PNU = 000

H

(Alarm 1)

IND = 01

H


PP = 01

H

(SEV_II, block II)

Unused

PWE2 = 00A3

H

E.OP3 (from alarm code)

Command count = 05

H

ZSW1 = 00

H b7

0 b6

0 b5

0 b4

0 b3

0 b2

0 b1

0 b0

0

ABC FU IPF OL SU Reverse rotation

Forward RUN rotation

Unused

134

Profibus-DP

8) Inverter resetting

Reset the inverter. For inverter resetting, write 0 to the inverter reset (PNU=001 H ) of the "SEV_I" area

(IND=0100 H ).

Data Example

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Word 4

Word 5

Word 6

2001

H

0100 H

0000

H

0000

H

0000

H

0000

H

Description


SPM = 0

PNU = 001

H

(Inverter reset)

IND = 01 H ( System environment variable area)

PP = 00 H (SEV_I, block I)

Unused

PWE2 = 0000

H

Command count = 00

H

ZSW1 = 00

H

(Unused)

Unused

135

4.9 Parameter Definitions

4.9 Parameter Definitions

4.9.1 IND=0000

H

Real-time monitor area

Profibus-DP

PNU (Decimal)

16

17

18

19

12

13

14

15

21

22

23

24

8

9

10

11

6

7

4

5

0

1

2

Note 1: When using FR-A5AP option.

Definition

Output frequency (minimum setting increments 0.01Hz)

Output current (minimum setting increments 0.01A)

Output voltage (minimum setting increments 0.1V)

Frequency setting (minimum setting increments 0.01Hz)

Speed (minimum setting increments 1r/min)

Motor torque (minimum setting increments 0.1%)

Converter output voltage (minimum setting increments 0.1V)

Regenerative brake duty (minimum setting increments 0.1%)

Electronic overcurrent protection load factor (minimum setting increments 0.1%)

Peak current peak value (minimum setting increments 0.01A)

Converter output voltage peak value (minimum setting increments 0.1V)

Input power (minimum setting increments 0.01kW)

Output power (minimum setting increments 0.01kW)

Input terminal status

Output terminal status

Load meter (minimum setting increments 0.1%)

Motor exciting current (minimum setting increments 0.01A)

Position pulse

Cumulative energization time (minimum setting increments 1 hr)


Actual operation time (minimum setting increments 1 hr)

Motor load factor (minimum setting increments 0.1%)

Cumulative power (minimum setting increments 1kWh)

Input terminal status monitor (PNU=14) bit map

15-12

0

11

CS

10

RES

9

STOP

8

MRS

7

JOG

6

RH

5

RM

4

RL

3

RT

2

AU

1

STR

0

STF

Output terminal status monitor (PNU=15) bit map

15-6

0

5

ABC

4

FU

3

OL

2

IPF

1

SU

0

RUN

Note: The bit format data here reflects Pr. 190 to Pr. 195. Changing the terminal assignment also changes this bit map.

136

Profibus-DP

4.9.2 IND=01pp

H

System environment variable area

(1) IND=0100

H

, pp=00, SEV_I, Block I

PNU (Decimal) Definition

4

5

6

2

3

0

1

7

10

11

13

14

User clear value setting

WO: Inverter reset

WO: Parameter clear

WO: All parameter clear

WO: Parameter user clear

WO: Parameter clear (ExComPr)

WO: All parameter clear (ExComPr)

Write value = 0000

H

Write value = 965A

H

Write value = 99AA

H

Write value = 5A55

H

Write value = 5A96

H

Write value = AA99

H

WO: Parameter user clear (ExComPr) Write value = 555A

H

Inverter status/control input command

Inverter status word: See below.

Bit 0: 1 = RUN

Bit 1: 1 = FWD

Bit 2: 1 = REV

Bit 3: 1 = SU

Bit 4: 1 = OL

Bit 5: 1 = IPF

Bit 6: 1 = FU

Bit 7: 1 = ABC

Bit 8-15: 0 to 7F

H

= command count

Control input command word: See below.

Bit 0: Reserved and should be set to 0.

Bit 1: 1 = STF

Bit 2: 1 = STR

Bit 3: 1 = RH(Note 1)

Bit 4: 1 = RM(Note 1)

Bit 5: 1 = RL(Note 1)

Bit 6: 1 = JOG(Note 1)

Bit 7: 1 = RT(Note 1)

Bit 8: 1 = AU(Note 1)

Bit 9: 1 = CS(Note 1)

Bit 10: 1 = MRS

Bit 11-15: Not used and always set to 0.

Write value = XXXX

H

Operation mode

10 H : External mode

Write value = 1X

11 H : PU operation mode

14 H : Profibus communication operation mode

H

Frequency setting (RAM) (Note 2)

WO: Frequency setting (EEPROM) (Note 2)

WO : Write only, read disabled

Note 1.

Bits 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9 correspond to Pr. 182, 181, 180, 185, 183, 184 and 186, respectively.

Note 2.

The data written to PNU13 or PNU14 can be read from PNU13.

137

Profibus-DP

(2) IND=0101

H

, pp=01, SEV_II, Block II, alarm history

PNU (Decimal)

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

Definition

Alarm 1 (Note 1)

Alarm 2

Alarm 3

Alarm 4

Alarm 5

Alarm 6

Alarm 7

Alarm 8

Note 1.

Writing a value 0000

H

to this parameter resets the alarm history buffer of all alarms. The other parameters are for read only.

Code

10

H

11

H

12

H

20

H

40

H

50

H

51

H

60

H

21 H

22

H

30

H

31

H

Description

OC1

OC2

OC3

OV1

OV2

OV3

THT

THM

FIN

IPF

UVT

OLT

Alarm code list

Code

70

H

80

H

81

H

90

H

A0 H

A1

H

A2

H

A3

H

B0

H

B1

H

B2

H

C0

H

Description

BE

GF

LF

OHT

OPT

OP1

OP2

OP3

PE

PUE

RET

CPU

D7 H

D8

H

D9

H

DA

H

DB

H

F6

H

F7

H

Code

C1

H

C2

H

D5

H

D6

H

Description

CTE

P24

Mb1

Mb2

Mb3

Mb4

Mb5

Mb6

Mb7

E6

E7

4.9.3 IND=0200

H

Standard parameter area

10

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

PNU

(Decimal)

4

5

6

2

3

0

1

7

8

9

Definition


Maximum frequency

Minimum frequency

Base frequency




Acceleration time

Deceleration time





Starting frequency


Jog frequency


MRS input selection

High-speed maximum frequency

Setting Range

0-30

0-120

0-120

0-400

0-400

0-400

0-400

0-3600

0-3600/0-360

0-500

0-120

0-10

0-30

0-60

0-5

0-400

0-3600/0-360

0-3

120-400

Hexadecimal

0-12C

0-2EE0

0-2EE0

0-9C40

0-9C40

0-9C40

0-9C40

0-8CA0

0-8CA0

0-C350

0-2EE0

0-64

0-12C

0-1770

0-5

0-9C40

0-8CA0

0-3

2EE0-9C40

Minimum Setting

Increments

0.1%

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

0.1s

0.1s/0.01s

0.01A

0.01Hz

0.1s

0.1%

0.01Hz

1

0.01Hz

0.1s/0.01s

1

0.01Hz

138

Profibus-DP

21

22

23

24

25

30

31

32

33

34

26

27

28

29

35

36

37

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

49

50

51

52

57

58

59

60

65

53

54

55

56

66

PNU (Decimal)

19

20

Definition












Regenerative brake duty

Frequency jump 1A

Frequency jump 1B

Frequency jump 2A

Frequency jump 2B

Frequency jump 3A

Frequency jump 3B

Speed display






Second torque boost





Inverter display data selection

PU main display data selection









Retry selection



Retry waiting time


Special regenerative brake duty

Applied motor






Parameter write disable selection

0-10

0-10

0

0-30

0-20

0-15

0-15

0-8

0-3

0-3

0-2

0-400

0-400

0-18

0-20

0-5

0-5

0-2

0-6

0-5

0-18

1-121

0-400

0-500

0-400

Setting Range

0-1000

0-400

0-1

0-200

0-200

0-400

0-400

0-400

0-400

0-1

0-3

0-1

0-400

0-400

0-400

0-400

0-400

0-400

2-9998

0-1000

0-400

0-400

0-3600/0-360

0-3600/0-360

0-30

0-400

0-200

Hexadecimal

0-2710

0-9C40

0-1

0-7D0

0-7D0

0-9C40

0-9C40

0-9C40

0-9C40

0-1

0-3

0-1

0-9C40

0-9C40

0-9C40

0-9C40

0-9C40

0-9C40

2-270E

0-3E8

0-9C40

0-9C40

0-8CA0

0-8CA0

0-12C

0-9C40

0-7D0

0-A

0-64

0

0-12C

0-14

0-F

0-F

0-8

0-3

0-3

0-2

0-9C40

0-9C40

0-12

0-18

0-12

1-79

0-9C40

0-C350

0-32

0-32

0-2

0-6

0-5

0-9C40

Minimum Setting

Increments

0.1V

0.01Hz

1

0.1%

0.1%

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

1

1

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

1

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

1

0.1%

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

0.1s/0.01s

0.1s/0.01s

0.1%

0.01Hz

0.1%

1

1

1

1

1

1

0.1s

1

0.1%

1

1

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

1

1

1

1

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

1

1

0.1s

0.1s

1

0.01Hz

139

Profibus-DP

115

124

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

PNU

(Decimal)

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

93

94

95

96

100

89

90

91

92

78

79

80

81

82

83

84

135

136

137

138

139

140

Definition Setting Range



Motor capacity

Number of motor poles


Rated motor voltage

Rated motor frequency

Speed control gain

Motor constant (R1)

Motor constant (R2)

Motor constant (L1)

Motor constant (L2)

Motor constant (X)

Online auto tuning selection

Auto tuning setting/status









0-1000

0-400

0-1000

0-400

0-1000

0-400

0-1000



Third acceleration/deceleration time

Third deceleration time

0-400

0-1000

0-3600

0-3600

Third torque boost

Third V/F (base frequency)

0-30

0-400

Third stall prevention operation current 0-200

Third stall prevention operation frequency

0-400


Station number

Communication speed

Stop bit length








PID integral time

Upper limit

Lower limit



Commercial power supply-inverter switchover sequence output terminal selection


Start waiting time

Commercial power supply-inverter switch-over selection at alarm occurrence



0-400

0-31

48-192

0-11

0-2

0-10

0-999.8

0-150

0-2

10-21

0-1000

0.1-3600

0-100

0-100

0-100

0.01-10

0-2

0-100

0-100

0-1

0-60

0-400

0-2

0-8

0.4-55

2-16

0-9999

0-1000

50-120

0-1000

0-9999

0-9999

0-9999

0-9999

0-9999

0-1

0-101

0-400

Hexadecimal

0-9C40

0-9C40

0-1F

30-C0

0-B

0-2

0-A

0-270E

0-96

0-2

A-15

0-2710

1-8CA0

0-3E8

0-3E8

0-3E8

1-3E8

0-2710

0-9C40

0-2710

0-9C40

0-2710

0-9C40

0-2710

0-9C40

0-2710

0-8CA0

0-8CA0

0-12C

0-9C40

0-7D0

0-2

0-8

28-157C

2-10

0-270F

0-2710

1388-2EE0

0-2710

0-270F

0-270F

0-270F

0-270F

0-270F

0-1

0-65

0-9C40

0-2

0-3E8

0-3E8

0-1

0-1770

0-9C40

0.01Hz

1

1

0.1%

0.1s

0.1%

0.1%

0.1%

0.01s

1

1

0.01Hz

1

1

1

0.1s

1ms

Minimum Setting

Increments

0.1V

0.01Hz

0.1V

0.01Hz

0.1V

0.01Hz

0.1V

0.01Hz

0.1V

0.1s

0.1s

0.1%

0.01Hz

0.1%

1

1

0.01kW

1

0.01A

0.1V

0.01Hz

0.1%

0.01

0.01

0.01

1

1

0.01

0.01

0.01Hz

1

0.1s

0.1s

1

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

140

Profibus-DP

PNU

(Decimal)

141

142

154

155

156

157

158

160

162

143

144

145

148

149

150

151

152

153

184

185

186

190

191

192

193

194

195

199

173

174

175

176

180

181

182

183

163

164

165

170

171

237

238

239

240

244

232

233

234

235

236

Definition





PU language switch-over



Output current detection level

Output current detection period

































Setting Range

0-1

0-10

0-100

0-25

1-21

0-11

0-1

0-99

0-99

0-99

0-199

0-199

0-199

0-199

0-199

0-199

0-999

0-20

0-100

0-200

0

0

0-999

0-999

0-999

0-999

0-99

0-99

0-99

0-99

0-360

0-400

0-360

0-110

0-7

0-200

0-200

0-200

0-10

0-200

0-1









Soft-PWM setting

Cooling fan operation selection

0-400

0-400

0-400

0-400

0-400

0-400

0-400

0-400

0-1

0-1

0-9C40

0-9C40

0-9C40

0-9C40

0-9C40

0-9C40

0-9C40

0-9C40

0-1

0-1

Hexadecimal

0-1

0-A

0-64

0-FA

1-15

0-B

0-1

0-63

0-63

0-63

0-C7

0-C7

0-C7

0-C7

0-C7

0-C7

0-3E7

0-C8

0-3E8

0-7D0

0

0

0-3E7

0-3E7

0-3E7

0-3E7

0-63

0-63

0-63

0-63

0-E10

0-9C40

0-E10

0-6E

0-7

0-7D0

0-7D0

0-7D0

0-64

0-7D0

0-64

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

1

1

Minimum Setting

Increments

0.1s

0.01Hz

1

1

1

1

1

0.1s

1

0.1s

1

1

0.1%

0.1%

0.1%

0.1s

0.1%

0.01s

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

1

1

141

Profibus-DP

PNU

(Decimal)

250

261

262

263

264

265

266

270

271

272

273

274

275

276

278

279

280

281

282

283

284

285

286

287

294

295

296

298

323

324


Stop selection

Power failure stop function

Subtracted frequency at deceleration start

Subtraction starting frequency

Power-failure deceleration time 1


Power-failure deceleration time switch-over frequency

Stop-on-contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection





Stop-on-contact exciting current low-speed multiplying factor



0-100

0-1

0-20

0-120

0-3600

0-3600

0-400

0-3

0-200

0-200

0-400

1-4000

0-1000




Brake operation frequency




Droop gain

Droop filter time constant

Pr. 338 Operation command write

Pr. 339 Speed command write

Pr. 340 Link start mode selection

0-1

0-1

0-1

0-2

Pr. 342 EEPROM write setting by link operation 0-1

Pr. 367 Speed feedback region 0-400

Pr. 368 Feedback gain 0-100

0-15

0-30

0-200

0-2

0-5

0-30

0-5

0-1

0-30

0-100

0-3

Hexadecimal

0-3E8

0-1

0-7D0

0-2EE0

0-8CA0

0-8CA0

0-9C40

0-7D0

0-7D0

0-9C40

1-FA0

0-3E8

0-F

0-BB8

0-7D0

0-14

0-32

0-BB8

0-32

0-1

0-BB8

0-2710

0-64

0-1

0-1

0-2

0-1

0-9C40

0-64

Minimum Setting

Increments

0.1s

1

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

0.1s

0.1s

0.01Hz

1

0.1%

0.1%

0.01Hz

1

1%

1

0.01Hz

0.1%

0.1s

0.1s

0.01Hz

0.1s

1

0.01Hz

0.01%

1

1

0.01s

1

1

0.01Hz

1

Note 1.

Values 65535, 6553.5 and 655.35 simply indicate that the functions are invalid and have the same meaning as 9999 indicated on the PU and in the instruction manual.

Note 2.

For details, refer to the FR-A500 instruction manual.

4.9.4 IND=0300

H

, Pr. 900 frequency calibration area

PNU

(Decimal)

327

328

329

330

331

332

Definition

Pr. 900 FM terminal calibration

Pr. 901 AM terminal calibration

Pr. 902 Frequency setting voltage bias

(frequency)

Pr. 903 Frequency setting voltage gain

(frequency)

Pr. 904 Frequency setting current bias

(frequency)

Pr. 905 Frequency setting current gain

(frequency)

Setting Range

0-60

1-400

0-60

1-400

Hexadecimal

Minimum Setting

Increments

0-1770

64-9C40

0-1770

64-9C40

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

0.01Hz

142

Profibus-DP

4.9.5 IND=0400

H

, Pr. 900 % calibration area

PNU (Decimal)

2

3

4

5

Definition

Pr. 902 Frequency setting voltage bias

(percent)

Pr. 903 Frequency setting voltage gain

(percent)

Pr. 904 Frequency setting current bias

(percent)

Pr. 905 Frequency setting current gain

(percent)

4.9.6 IND=0800

H

Programmed operation time setting area

PNU (Decimal) Definition Setting Range Hexadecimal

222

223

224

225

218

219

220

221

214

215

216

217

210

211

212

213

226

227

228

229

230

231

200

201

206

207

208

209

202

203

204

205

Pr. 200 Program minute/second selection

Pr. 201 Program time setting 1






























Pr. 231 Timer setting

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-3

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-9959

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-3

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

0-26E7

Note: Use minutes:seconds (or hours:minutes) to set the time. To set 2 minutes 30 seconds, for example, set 0230

(decimal) = E6

H

.

Minimum Setting

Increments

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

143

Profibus-DP

4.9.7 IND=0700

H

Programmed operation rotation direction setting area

PNU

(Decimal)

24

25

26

27

28

29

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1


Pr. 201 Program rotation direction setting 1






























Note: The setting of 0 indicates a stop, 1 forward rotation, and 2 reverse rotation.

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

Hexadecimal

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

0-2

Minimum Setting

Increments

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

144

Profibus-DP

4.9.8 IND=0600

H

Programmed operation frequency setting area

PNU

(Decimal)

24

25

26

27

28

29

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

Definition

Pr. 201 Program frequency setting 1






























Setting Range

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

0-400, 9999

Hexadecimal

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

0-FA0, FFFF

Minimum Setting

Increments

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

0.1Hz

145

4.10 Profibus Device Data (GSD File)

Profibus-DP

4.10 Profibus Device Data (GSD File)

The configuration software of the network master uses the device data file to recognize the features and functions of the

Profibus DP device. This file is an ASCII file and is available from the Internet (http://www.profibus.com) or Mitsubishi

(name: MEAU0865.GSD) or can be created directly. Note that Remarks are not included in the ASCII file itself.

Parameter Value Remarks

#Profibus_DP

Vendor_Name

Model_Name

Ident_Number

Revision

Protocol_Ident

Station_Type

FMS_Supp

Hardware_Release

Software_Release

9.6_supp

19.2_supp

93.75_supp

187.5_supp

500_supp

1.5M_supp

3.0M_supp

6.0M_supp

12.0M_supp

MaxTadr_9.6

MaxTadr_19.2

MaxTadr_93.75

MaxTadr_187.5

MaxTadr_500

MaxTadr_1.5M

MaxTadr_3.0M

MaxTadr_6.0M

MaxTadr_12.0M

Redundancy

Repcater_Ctrl_Sig

24V_Pins

Freeze_Mode_supp

Sync_Mode_supp

Auto_Baud_supp

Set_Slave_Add_supp

User_Prm_Data_Len

Min_Slave_Interval

Modular_Station

Max_Module

Max_Input_Len

Max_Output_Len

Max_Data_Len

Module

EndModule

150

300

450

800

60

60

60

100

1

1

1

60

1

1

1

1

"Mitsubishi Electric

Automation,Inc."

"FR-A5NP"

0865

H

0

0

"Revision #.##"

0

1

1

"Series **"

"Revision #.##"

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

2

1

1

1

12

12

24

"6 Word Input/6 Word Output" 75

H

File header

(Note 1)

= 2149 (decimal system)

Profibus DP

9600bps support

19.2Kbps support

93.75Kbps support

187.5Kbps support

500Kbps support

1.5Mbps support

3.0Mbps support

6.0Mbps support

12.0Mbps support

60bit times

60bit times

60bit times

60bit times

100bit times

150bit times

300bit times

450bit times

800bit times

Without remainder

Ctrl-P is TTL-level.

Net24VDC cannot be connected.

Freeze support

Sync mode support

Auto Baud detection support

Slave Address setting not made

Without user parameter data

Without module unit (Note 2)

1ID Byte

12 input bytes

12 output bytes

12+12 = 24

Code = 117 = 75

H for 6W I/O’s (Note 3)

Note 1.

In some master devices, the Vendor_Name is up to 10 characters. In this case, use "Mitsubishi".

Note 2.

In some PLCs, Modular_Station=1&/Min_Slave_Interval=20

Note 3.

Since I/O's=6W, the 75 H =117 code is automatically created by COMET200.

146

5

APPENDICES

5.1 Data Code Lists.................................................................................... 147

5.1 Data Code Lists

APPENDICES

The following data code lists are used to read and write the parameter values in the RS-485 operation mode or CC-Link operation mode.

Function

Parameter

Number

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

6

7

4

5

8

0

1

2

3

20

32

33

34

35

36

37

41

42

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

43

44

45

46

47

48

21

22

23

49

50

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

Name


Maximum frequency

Minimum frequency

Base frequency




Acceleration time

Deceleration time





Starting frequency


Jog frequency


MRS input selection














Frequency jump 1A

Frequency jump 1B

Frequency jump 2A

Frequency jump 2B

Frequency jump 3A

Frequency jump 3B

Speed display






Second torque boost












20

21

22

23

24

25

29

2A

18

19

1A

1B

1C

1D

1E

1F

2B

2C

2D

2E

2F

30

15

16

17

Read

09

0A

0B

0C

0D

0E

0F

10

04

05

06

07

08

00

01

02

03

11

12

13

14

31

32

34

35

36

37

38

39

3A

147

B1

B2

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

B9

BA

A0

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A9

AA

98

99

9A

9B

9C

9D

9E

9F

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

B0

95

96

97

8C

8D

8E

8F

90

91

92

93

84

85

86

87

88

89

8A

8B

80

Data Codes

Write

Link parameter extension setting (Data code 7F/FF)

0

81

82

83

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

94 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

APPENDICES

Function

Parameter

Number

59

60

61

62

63

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

64

65

66

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

93

94

95

96

100

101

102

103

112

113

114

81

82

83

84

89

90

91

92

76

77

78

79

80

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

Name



Reference current for intelligent mode

Reference current for intelligent mode accel.

Reference current for intelligent mode decel.

Starting frequency for elevator mode

Retry selection



Retry waiting time



Applied motor









Motor capacity

Number of motor poles


Rated motor voltage


Speed control gain

Motor constant (R1)

Motor constant (R2)

Motor constant (L1)

Motor constant (L2)

Motor constant (X)

Online auto tuning selection












Third acceleration/deceleration time

Third deceleration time

Third torque boost

Third V/F (base frequency)

Third stall prevention operation current

Third stall prevention operation frequency


Station number

Communication speed







148

Read

3B

3C

3D

3E

3F

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

4A

4B

40

41

42

04

05

06

07

08

09

0A

0B

5D

5E

5F

60

00

01

02

03

0C

0D

0E

51

52

53

54

59

5A

5B

5C

4C

4D

4E

4F

50

0F

15

16

17

18

10

11

12

13

14

Data Codes

Write


BB

BC

BD

BE

BF

C0

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

C7

C8

C9

CA

CB

84

85

86

87

88

89

8A

8B

DD

DE

DF

E0

80

81

82

83

8C

8D

8E

D1

D2

D3

D4

D9

DA

DB

DC

CC

---

CE

---

D0

8F

95

96

97

98

90

91

92

93

94

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

APPENDICES

162

163

164

165

170

171

184

185

186

190

191

192

193

194

195

173

174

175

176

180

181

182

183

Function

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

Parameter

Number

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

Name



PID integral time

Upper limit

Lower limit





Start waiting time

Commercial power supply-inverter switchover selection at alarm occurrence







Parameter unit language switch-over












160

27

28

29

2A

2B

2C

Read

1C

1D

1E

1F

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

3A

00 User group read selection
























149

02

03

04

05

0A

0B

1F

20

21

22

23

18

19

1A

1E

14

15

16

17

0D

0E

0F

10

B0

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

B9

BA

80

82

83

84

85

8A

8B

9F

A0

A1

A2

A3

98

99

9A

9E

94

95

96

97

8D

8E

8F

90

A7

A8

A9

AA

AB

AC

Write

Data Codes


9C

9D

9E

9F

A0

A1

A2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

A3 1

A4

A5

A6

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

APPENDICES

Function

Parameter

Number

199

200

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

201

202

203

204

205

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

237

238

239

240

244

Name


Programmed operation minute/second selection

Program setting 1

Program setting 2

Program setting 3

Program setting 4

Program setting 5

Program setting 6

Program setting 7

Program setting 8

Program setting 9

Program setting 10

Program setting 11

Program setting 12

Program setting 13

Program setting 14

Program setting 15

Program setting 16

Program setting 17

Program setting 18

Program setting 19

Program setting 20

Program setting 21

Program setting 22

Program setting 23

Program setting 24

Program setting 25

Program setting 26

Program setting 27

Program setting 28

Program setting 29

Program setting 30

Timer setting









Soft-PWM setting


250

270

271

272

273

274

275

276

261

262

263

264

265

266

Stop selection

Power failure stop selection

Subtracted frequency at deceleration start

Subtraction starting frequency



Power-failure deceleration time switchover frequency

Stop-on-contact/load torque f selection





Stop-on-contact exciting current lowspeed multiplying factor


150

Read

27

3C

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

3D

3E

3F

40

41

4D

4E

4F

50

51

49

4A

4B

4C

5A

5B

28

29

2A

2B

2C

56

57

58

59

52

53

54

55

2D

2E

2F

30

34

3A

4E

4F

50

51

52

53

54

45

46

47

48

49

4A

BA

CE

CF

D0

D1

D2

D3

D4

C5

C6

C7

C8

C9

CA

Write

Data Codes


A7 2

BC

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

C7

C8

BD

BE

BF

C0

C1

C9

CA

CB

CC

CD

CE

CF

D0

D1

DA

DB

A8

A9

AA

AB

AC

D6

D7

D8

D9

D2

D3

D4

D5

AD

AE

AF

B0

B4

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

1

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

APPENDICES

Function Name





Brake operation frequency




Droop gain

Droop filter time constant

Communication speed

Stop bit length




CR, LF presence/absence

BCD code input bias

BCD code input gain

Binary code input bias

Binary code input gain

Digital input and analog compensation input enable/disable selection

Data read timing signal operation selection

Analog output signal selection

Setting for zero analog output

Setting for maximum analog output

Analog output signal voltage/current changing

Analog meter voltage output selection

Setting for zero analog meter voltage output

Setting for maximum analog meter voltage output

Y0 output selection

Y1 output selection

Y2 output selection

Y3 output selection

Y4 output selection

Y5 output selection

Y6 output selection

RA1 output selection



RA output selection


Communication speed

Stop bit length






Speed command write



E

2

PROM write presence/absence



Frequency setting voltage bias

Frequency setting voltage gain

Frequency setting current bias

Frequency setting current gain

Buzzer control

305

306

307

308

309

310

311

312

318

319

320

321

322

330

331

332

313

314

315

316

317

333

334

335

336

337

338

339

340

341

342

900

901

902

903

904

905

990

Parameter

Number

284

285

286

287

332

333

334

335

278

279

280

281

282

283

336

341

300

301

302

303

304

05

06

07

08

09

0A

0B

0C

12

13

14

15

16

1E

1F

20

0D

0E

0F

10

11

26

27

28

29

21

22

23

24

25

2A

5C

5D

5E

5F

60

61

5A

Read

5C

5D

5E

5F

20

21

22

23

56

57

58

59

5A

5B

24

25

00

01

02

03

04

85

86

87

88

89

8A

8B

8C

92

93

94

95

96

9E

9F

A0

8D

8E

8F

90

91

A6

A7

A8

A9

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

AA

DC

DD

DE

DF

E0

E1

DA

Write

Data Codes


DC

DD

DE

DF

A0

A1

A2

A3

D6

D7

D8

D9

DA

DB

A4

A5

80

81

82

83

3

3

3

2

2

2

2

3

2

2

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

3

84 3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

1

1

1

3

1

1

1

9

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

151

APPENDICES

Function

Parameter

Number

Name

Second parameter switch-over

Frequency setting

Running frequency

(RAM)

Running frequency

(E

2

PROM)

Monitor

Frequency monitor

Output current monitor

Output voltage monitor

Special monitor

Alarm display

Special monitor selection

No.

Most recent No. 1, No. 2

/alarm display clear




Inverter status monitor/operation command

Operation mode acquisition

All parameter clear

Inverter reset

Link parameter extension setting

Read

6C

6D

7F

6E

6F

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

7A

7B

Write

Data Codes


EC

ED

EE

F3

F4

FA

FB

FC

FD

FF

152

APPENDICES

Function Name


Maximum frequency

Minimum frequency

Base frequency




Acceleration time

Deceleration time





Starting frequency


Jog frequency


MRS input selection













Frequency jump 1A

Frequency jump 1B

Frequency jump 2A

Frequency jump 2B

Frequency jump 3A

Frequency jump 3B

Speed display

Automatic torque boost

Automatic torque boost operation starting current






Second torque boost












Parameter

Number

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

19

5

6

7

2

3

0

1

4

20

21

22

23

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

24

25

26

27

28

39

44

45

46

47

48

41

42

43

49

50

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

153

Read

08

09

0A

0B

0C

0D

0E

0F

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

10

11

13

14

15

16

17

1D

1E

1F

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

18

19

1A

1B

1C

27

29

2A

2B

2C

2D

2E

2F

30

31

32

34

35

36

37

38

39

3A

B1

B2

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

B9

BA

95

96

97

9D

9E

9F

A0

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

98

99

9A

9B

9C

A7

A9

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

B0

Write

Data Codes


88

89

8A

8B

8C

8D

8E

8F

80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

90

91

93

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

94 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

APPENDICES

59

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

148

149

60

61

62

63

65

66

67

68

69

71

72

73

74

75

120

121

122

123

124

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

104

105

106

107

108

109

117

118

119

76

77

78

79

100

101

102

103

135

136

137

138

152

153

Function

Parameter

Number

Name

Read

3B

27

28

29

2A

2B

2C

2D

30

31

3C

3D

3E

43

44

45

47

48

49

4A

4B

14

15

16

17

18

1C

1D

1E

1F

20

21

22

08

09

11

12

13

04

05

06

07

00

01

02

03

4C

4D

4E

4F

3F

41

42

23

24

25

26

34

35






Retry selection



Retry waiting time


Applied motor



















Station number

Communication speed









PID integral time

Upper limit

Lower limit





Start waiting time

Commercial power supply-inverter switchover selection at alarm occurrence












154

Write

Data Codes


0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

BB

A7

A8

A9

AA

AB

AC

AD

B0

B1

BC

BD

BE

BF

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C7

C8

C9

CA

CB

94

95

96

97

98

9C

9D

9E

9F

A0

A1

A2

88

89

91

92

93

84

85

86

87

CC

---

CE

---

80

81

82

83

A3

A4

A5

A6

B4

B5

1

1

1

1

APPENDICES

240

244

305

306

307

308

309

310

311

251

252

253

300

301

302

303

304

312

313

314

315

316

317

318

319

Function

162

163

164

165

170

171

186

190

191

192

193

194

195

173

174

175

176

180

181

182

183

184

185

Parameter

Number

154

155

156

157

158

160

Name






























199 User's initial value setting

Soft-PWM setting


Output phase failure protection function

Override bias

Override gain

BCD code input bias

BCD code input gain

Binary code input bias

Binary code input gain

Digital input and analog compensation input enable/disable selection

Data read timing signal operation selection

Analog output signal selection

Setting for zero analog output

Setting for maximum analog output

Analog output signal voltage/current changing

Analog meter voltage output selection

Setting for zero analog meter voltage output

Setting for maximum analog meter voltage output

Y0 output selection

Y1 output selection

Y2 output selection

Y3 output selection

Y4 output selection

Y5 output selection

Y6 output selection

155

02

03

04

05

0A

0B

1A

1E

1F

20

21

22

23

14

15

16

17

18

19

0D

0E

0F

10

27

30

34

05

06

07

08

09

0A

0B

3B

3C

3D

00

01

02

03

04

0C

0D

0E

0F

10

11

12

13

Read

36

37

38

39

3A

00

82

83

84

85

8A

8B

9A

9E

9F

A0

A1

A2

A3

94

95

96

97

98

99

8D

8E

8F

90

A7

B0

B4

85

86

87

88

89

8A

8B

BB

BC

BD

80

81

82

83

84

8C

8D

8E

8F

90

91

92

93

Write

Data Codes


B6

B7

B8

B9

BA

1

1

1

1

1

80 2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

APPENDICES

Function

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Parameter

Number

320

321

322

900

901

902

903

904

905

990

991

-

330

331

332

333

334

335

336

337

338

339

340

341

342

-

Name




RA output selection


Communication speed

Stop bit length






Speed command write



E

2

PROM write presence/absence







Buzzer control

LCD contrast

Second parameter switch-over

Frequency setting

Running frequency

(RAM)

Running frequency

(E

2

PROM)

Monitor

Frequency monitor

Output current monitor

Output voltage monitor

Special monitor

Special monitor selection

No.

Alarm display


/alarm display clear




Inverter status monitor/operation command

Operation mode acquisition

All parameter clear

Inverter reset

Link parameter extension setting

74

75

76

77

7A

7B

-

-

7F

6E

6F

70

71

72

73

Read

14

15

16

5C

5D

5E

5F

60

61

5A

5B

6C

22

23

24

25

26

1E

1F

20

21

27

28

29

2A

6D

F4

-

-

-

FA

FB

FC

FD

FF

EE

-

-

-

-

F3

Write

Data Codes


94 3

95

96

DC

DD

DE

DF

E0

E1

DA

DB

EC

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

9E

9F

A0

A1

A7

A8

A9

AA

3

3

1

1

9

1

1

1

1

9

-

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

ED -

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

156

APPENDICES

Function

21

22

23

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

24

25

26

27

29

30

39

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

52

54

55

56

57

Parameter

Number

9

10

11

12

13

6

7

8

3

4

5

0

1

2

14

15

16

18

19

20

58

Name


Maximum frequency

Minimum frequency

Base frequency




Acceleration time

Deceleration time





Starting frequency


Jog frequency














Frequency jump 1A

Frequency jump 1B

Frequency jump 2A

Frequency jump 2B

Frequency jump 3A

Frequency jump 3B

Speed display

Frequency at 5V (10V) input

Frequency at 20mA input






Second torque boost


Second electronic overcurrent protection

Operation panel/PU main display data selection






15

16

17

1F

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

18

19

1A

1B

1D

1E

27

29

2A

2B

2C

2D

2E

2F

30

34

36

37

38

39

Read

06

07

08

09

0A

0B

0C

0D

00

01

02

03

04

05

0E

0F

10

12

13

14

3A

59 Remote setting function selection 3B

95

96

97

9F

A0

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

98

99

9A

9B

9D

9E

A7

A9

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

B0

B4

B6

B7

B8

B9

Write

Data Codes


86

87

88

89

8A

8B

8C

8D

80

81

82

83

84

85

8E

8F

90

92

93

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

94 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

BA 0

BB 0

157

APPENDICES

Function

Parameter

Number

60

61

62

63

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

90

96

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

77

78

79

80

82

83

84

145

146

150

151

152

153

156

Name

Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode




Retry selection



Retry waiting time



Applied motor








Motor capacity


Rated motor voltage


Motor constant (R1)


Station number

Communication speed

Stop bit length








PID integral time

Upper limit

Lower limit




Frequency setting command selection






Read

3C

3D

3E

3F

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

4A

4B

5A

60

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

1C

1D

1E

1F

20

21

22

4D

4E

4F

50

52

53

54

2D

2E

32

33

34

35

38

AE

B2

B3

B4

B5

BF

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

C7

C8

C9

CA

CB

DA

E0

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

9C

9D

9E

9F

A0

A1

A2

CD

CE

CF

D0

D2

D3

D4

AD

Write

Data Codes


BC

BD

0

0

BE 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

B8 1

160 User group read selection 00 80 2

171

173

174

175

176






158

0B

0D

0E

0F

10

8B

8D

8E

8F

90

2

2

2

2

2

APPENDICES

Function

Parameter

Number

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

244

245

246

247

180

181

182

183

190

191

192

249

Name




MRS terminal function selection



A, B, C terminal function selection









Soft-PWM setting


Rated motor slip

Slip compensation response time

Constant output region slip compensation selection

Starting-time ground fault detection presence/absence

250 Stop selection

338

339

340

900

902

903

904

905

922

923

990

991


Speed command write







Built-in frequency setting potentiometer bias

Built-in frequency setting potentiometer gain

Buzzer control

LCD contrast

Read

2C

2D

2E

2F

28

29

2A

2B

30

34

35

36

37

14

15

16

17

1E

1F

20

39

3A

26

27

28

5C

5E

5F

60

61

16

17

5A

5B

Write

Data Codes


AC

AD

AE

AF

A8

A9

AA

AB

B0

B4

B5

B6

B7

94

95

96

97

9E

9F

A0

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

B9 2

BA

A6

A7

A8

DC

DE

DF

E0

E1

96

97

DA

DB

2

3

3

3

1

1

1

1

1

9

9

9

9

159

Mitsubishi Electric FR-A5NR Specifications

TRANSISTORIZED INVERTER

500/

500/

500 series

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

1 COMPUTER LINK (RS-485) 1

2 CC-Link 26

3 Device Net

73

4 Profibus-DP 114

5 APPENDICES 147

COMPUTER LINK (RS-485)

1.1 Overview

1.2 Specifications

1.2 Specifications

! Control power: Supplied by the inverter

! Communication power: 5VDC, maximum 60mA

! [EIA Standard] Shared between RS-422 and RS-485

! Multidrop link system

! Twisted pair cable

! Maximum 500m overall

! Up to 10 inverters for RS-422 computer interface

! Up to 32 inverters for RS-485 computer interface

! Computer with RS-422 or RS-485 interface function

By using a converter, a computer with RS-232C interface function is also applicable.

! Example: Response time when forward (reverse) rotation command is given by communication

× 5 × 12 = 0.00625s(6.25ms)

× 5 × 12 = 0.003125s(3.125ms)

× 5 × 12 = 0.2s(200ms)

1.3 Structure

1.3 Structure

1.4 Configuration and Wiring Method

1.4 Configuration and Wiring Method

Note 4. Splitter

1.5 Inverter Setting

1.5 Inverter Setting

<Connection with PU connector>

<Connection of FR-A5NR>

1.6 Operation Modes

1.6 Operation Modes

By setting parameters Pr. 338 "operation command write" and Pr. 339

"speed command write" as appropriate, the operation signal and running frequency can be entered from the control circuit terminals.

1.7 Operational Functions

1.7 Operational Functions

1.8 Computer Programming

1.8 Computer Programming

1.9 Troubleshooting

1.9 Troubleshooting

1.10 Setting Items and Set Data

1.10 Setting Items and Set Data

1.11 Error Code List

1.11 Error Code List

CC-Link

2.1 Overview

2.2 Specifications

2.3 Structure

2.4 Configuration and Wiring Method

2.5 Inverter Setting

2.6 Operation Modes

2.7 Operational Functions

2.8 PLC Programming

2.9 How to Check for Error with the LED Lamps

2.10 Troubleshooting

2.1 Overview

2.2 Specifications

2.2 Specifications

1) 800 + (a × 15)

2) 900 + (b × 50)

3) When c 26: 1200 + (c × 100)

When c • 26: 3700 + {(c - 26) × 25} a : Total number of occupied remote I/O stations b : Total number of occupied remote device stations (CC-Linkcompatible inverters) c : Total number of occupied intelligent device stations (including local stations)

* : Only when communication fault stations (including error invalid stations and temporary error invalid stations) exist

Example: Transmission speed of 2.5Mbps in the following system configuration example

BT = 3.2

ST = 1700

NI = 13 16 1) 800 + (4 × 15) = 860

NW = 12 16 2) 900 + (4 × 50) = 1100

N = 8 3) 1200 + (5 × 100) = 1700

Ni = 13 a = 4 b = 4 c = 5